California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol
3
and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 25
For Safe Driving P. 26 Seat Belts P. 30 Airbags P. 37
2 Instrument Panel P. 65
Indicators P. 66 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 81
2 Controls P. 99
Clock P. 100 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 102
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
P. 121
Adjusting the Seats P. 137
2 Features P. 159
Audio System P. 160 Audio System Basic Operation P. 166, 184
Customized Features
*
P. 220 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 233, 264
2 Driving P. 291
Before Driving P. 292 Towing a Trailer P. 297
Refueling P. 332 Fuel Economy P. 335
2 Maintenance P. 337
Before Performing Maintenance P. 338 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 341
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 370
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance P. 384
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 391
Tools P. 392 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 393
Overheating P. 407 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 409
2 Information P. 419
Specifications P. 420 Identification Numbers P. 424
Emissions Testing P. 427 Warranty Coverages P. 429
Contents
Child Safety P. 50 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62 Safety Labels P. 63
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 113 Security System P. 116 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 119
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 122 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 135
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 145 Heating and Cooling
*
P. 152
Audio Error Messages P. 211 General Information on the Audio System P. 217
When Driving P. 298 Braking P. 326 Parking Your Vehicle P. 330
Accessories and Modifications P. 336
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 345 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 360
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 372 Battery P. 381 Remote Transmitter Care P. 382
Cleaning P. 385
Engine Does Not Start P. 400 Jump Starting P. 403 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 406
Fuses P. 413 Emergency Towing P. 417
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 425 Reporting Safety Defects P. 426
Authorized Manuals P. 431 Customer Service Information P. 432
Quick Reference Guide
P. 4
Safe Driving
P. 25
Instrument Panel
P. 65
Controls
P. 99
Features
P. 159
Driving
P. 291
Maintenance
P. 337
Handling the Unexpected
P. 391
Information
P. 419
Index
P. 433
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
*1:
Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
❙
Hazard Warning Button
❙
Seat Heater Switches
*
(P151)
❙
Ignition Switch
*1
(P122)
❙
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button
*
(P319)
❙
ECON Button
*
(P314)
❙
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button
*
(P319)
❙
Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P134)
❙
Navigation System
*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙
Audio System
(P166, 184)
❙
Rear Window Defogger
(P133)
❙
Heated Mirror Button
*
(P133)
❙
Heating and Cooling System
*
(P152)
❙
Climate Control System
*
(P155)
❙
intelligent Multi-Information
Display (i-MID)
(P83)
❙
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*1
(P123)
❙
System Indicators
(P66)
❙
Gauges
(P81)
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Headlights/Turn Signals
(P127)
❙
Wipers/Washers
(P131)
❙
Km/Mile Change Knob
(P81)
❙
CLOCK Knob
*
(P100)
❙
MENU Button
(P87)
❙
(+
/
(-
/ / Buttons
(P87)
❙
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons
*
() See Navigation System Manual
❙
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons
(P233, 264)
❙
(SEL/RESET) Knob
(P84)
❙
SOURCE Button
(P87)
❙
(Display/Information) Button
(P83)
❙
Brightness Control
(P132)
❙
LaneWatch
TM*
(P320)
❙
Fog Lights
*
(P130)
❙
Paddle Shifter (Shift Down)
*
(P309)
❙
Paddle Shifter (Shift Up)
*
(P309)
❙
Cruise Control Buttons
(P315)
❙
Horn (Press an area around .)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Passenger's Front Airbag
(P40)
❙
Glove Box
(P147)
❙
Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission
(P305, 307)
Manual Transmission
(P311)
❙
Hood Release Handle
(P347)
❙
Fuel Fill Door Release Handle
(P333)
❙
Driver’s Pocket
❙
Trunk Release
(P113)
❙
Driver's Front Airbag
(P40)
❙
Door Mirror Controls
(P135)
❙
Power Door Lock Master Switch
(P111)
❙
Power Window Switches
(P119)
❙
Parking Brake
(P326)
❙
Interior Fuse Box
(P414)
❙
Rearview Mirror
(P135)
❙
Accessory Power Socket
(P150)
❙
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
(P162)
❙
USB/HDMI® Port
*
(P161)
7
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Front Seat
(P137)
❙
Side Airbags
(P44)
❙
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat)
(P57)
❙
Side Curtain Airbags
(P46)
❙
Ceiling Light
(P145)
❙
Grab Handle
❙
Seat Belts
(P30)
❙
Moonroof Switch
*
(P121)
❙
Map Lights
(P146)
❙
Sun Visors
❙
Vanity Mirrors
❙
Rear Seat
(P143)
❙
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat
(P59)
❙
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat
(P55)
❙
USB Adapter Cable
(P162)
❙
Coat Hook
(P150)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
❙
Maintenance Under the Hood
(P345)
❙
Windshield Wipers
(P131, 370)
❙
Tires
(P372, 393)
❙
Fog Lights
*
(P130, 364)
❙
Door Lock/Unlock Control
(P105)
❙
Power Door Mirrors
(P135)
❙
Headlights
(P127, 360)
❙
Emergency Trunk Release Lever
(P115)
❙
Opening/Closing the Trunk
(P113)
❙
How to Refuel
(P333)
❙
High-Mount Brake Light
*
(P369)
❙
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Lights
(P127, 365)
❙
Back-Up Lights
(P367)
❙
Rear Turn Signal Lights
(P367)
❙
Brake/Taillights/Rear Side Marker
Lights
(P367)
❙
Rearview Camera
*
(P331)
❙
Trunk Release Button
*
(P114)
9
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist System
*
(P314)
Ambient Meter
● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Blue green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
Blue: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button
(P314)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator
(P75)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
The message is displayed for a few seconds
when the ECON button is pressed.
* Not available on all models
10
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving
(P25)
Airbags
(P37)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety
(P50)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(P62)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist
(P29)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts
(P30)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
11
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel
(P 65)
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
*
Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
*
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
System Indicators
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
System Message
Indicator
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Door Open Indicator
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
Tachometer
Instant Fuel
Economy Gauge
*
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator
*
Low Fuel Indicator
Gauges
(P 81)
/intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
(P 83)
/
System Indicators
(P 66)
Trunk Open Indicator
ECON Mode Indicator
*
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
High Temperature
Indicator
Low Temperature
Indicator
i-VTEC
Indicator
Rev
Indicator
2.4 ℓ engine models
Ambient Meter
*
Smart Entry System
Indicator
*
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
System Indicators
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
M (7-speed manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
*
* Not available on all models
12
Quick Reference Guide
Controls
(P99)
Clock
(P100)
a
Press the CLOCK knob to access the
clock adjustment mode screen.
b
Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the
hours.
c
Press the CLOCK knob. The display
switches to minute adjustment.
d
Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the
minutes.
e
Press the CLOCK knob to complete
clock adjustment.
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
Models without navigation system
Models without display audio
Models with navigation system
ENGINE START/STOP
Button
*
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
Turn Signals
(P127)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Lights
(P127)
Wipers and Washers
(P131)
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
*
: Long Delay
: Short Delay
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
13
Quick Reference Guide
Steering Wheel
(P134)
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside
(P110)
● Pull either door inner handle to unlock
and open it at the same time.
Trunk
(P113)
● To unlock and open the trunk:
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the
remote transmitter or the smart entry
remote.
• Press the trunk release button
*
on the
trunk lid.
Power Door Mirrors
(P135)
● With the ignition switch in ON
(w
*1
, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Trunk Release
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows
(P119)
● With the ignition switch in ON
(w
*1
, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
OFF position, the passenger's window can
be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
ON position (indicator is on), the
passenger's window switch is disabled.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.
Power Window Lock Button
Window
Switch
Indicator
* Not available on all models
14
Quick Reference Guide
Heating and Cooling System
*
(P152)
● Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed.
● Press the Mode buttons ( / / / ) to select the vents air flows from.
● Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
● Use the button for maximum cool setting.
● Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control
Dial
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror
*
) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
Button
Button
Button
Button
Temperature Control Dial
Button
Button
Mode Buttons
15
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System
*
(P155)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. See the Navigation System Manual for complete details.
On models with navigation system
(MODE Control)
Button
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror
*
) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
(Recirculation) Button
Temperature
Control Dial
AUTO Button
(ON/OFF) Button
Fan Control Dial
* Not available on all models
16
Quick Reference Guide
Features
(P159)
Audio Remote Controls
*
(P164)
●
(+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM1/
FM2/AM/CD/AUX.
● / Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
(+ / (- / / Button
SOURCE
Button
Audio system
(P160)
For navigation system operation
() See the Navigation System Manual
00230075°
F miles
i-MID
AM Button
FM Button
SCAN Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
Selector Knob
Button
(Power)
Button
CD Button
AUX Button
CD Slot
(CD Eject)
Button
Preset Buttons
(1-6)
Button
SETUP Button
SKIP/SEEK
Button
PHONE Button
(P 166)
Models with one display
18
Quick Reference Guide
Driving
(P291)
M Indicator
Shift Indicator
Manual Transmission
*
(P 311)
Continuously Variable Transmission
*
(P305, 307)
● Shift to
(P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S)
● Better acceleration.
● Increased engine braking.
● Going up or down hills.
● On models with paddle
shifter, 7-speed manual
shift mode can be used.
Models without
paddle shifter
Models with
paddle shifter
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of
(P.
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Drive
● Normal driving.
● On models with paddle
shifter, 7-speed mode can
be used temporarily.
Low
*
● Further increased engine
braking.
● Going up or down hills.
Shift Down
(-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
(P 309)
● Allows you to manually shift
the transmission up or down
without removing your hands
from the steering wheel.
When the shift lever is in (S
● Pulling a paddle shifter
changes the mode from
continuously variable
transmission to 7-speed manual
shift mode.
● The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D
● Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable
transmission to 7-speed manual
shift mode. The selected speed
number is displayed in the shift
indicator.
Shift Lever
Release
Button
19
Quick Reference Guide
VSA® OFF Button
(P319)
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control
(P315)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the –/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
(P322)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
U.S. models
Refueling
(P332)
a
Push the fuel fill door
release handle.
b
Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
c
Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
d
After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
Fuel recommendation:
Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Unleaded premium gasoline with a pump octane
number 91 or higher recommended
Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L)
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
* Not available on all models
20
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance
(P337)
Under the Hood
(P345)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid and clutch
*
fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
c
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights
(P360)
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades
(P370)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires
(P372)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
Quick Reference Guide
21
Handling the Unexpected
(P391)
Flat Tire
(P393)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P409)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Engine Won't Start
(P 400)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse
(P413)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating
(P407)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P417)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
* Not available on all models
22
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
The ignition switch does
not turn from
(0 to (q
*1
.
Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
The ignition switch does
not turn from
(q
to
(0
*1
and I cannot remove the
key. Why?
The shift lever should be moved to
(P
.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
*2
23
Quick Reference Guide
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
●
The key is left in the ignition switch
*
.
●
The power mode
*
is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
●
Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●
The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Is it possible to use
unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 87 or higher on
this vehicle?
Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number of 91 or higher
is recommended.
If premium unleaded gasoline with a PON of 91 or higher is not
available, you can temporarily use the gasoline with a PON of
87 or higher.
This will result in decreased engine performance, and can cause
occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine.
2.4 ℓ engine models
* Not available on all models
24
25
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 26
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 28
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 30
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 37
Types of Airbags ................................ 40
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40
Side Airbags....................................... 44
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 46
Airbag System Indicators.................... 47
Airbag Care ....................................... 49
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 50
Safety of Infants and Small Children .. 52
Safety of Larger Children ................... 60
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 62
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 63
26
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
27
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
28
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
6
7
8
10
11
99
8
7
10
29
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 110
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 137
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 139
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 50
■
Safety CheckList
1Safety CheckList
If the door open indicator is on, a door is not
completely closed. Close both doors tightly until the
indicator goes off.
2 Door Open Indicator P. 71
30
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 57
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Continued
31
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON
(w
*1
before the driver's seat belt is fastened, the
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON
(w
*1
.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound. The indicator also may not come on and the
beeper may not sound when the occupant is not
heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such
occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should
be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag
likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 50
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
32
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
33
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 137
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
34
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
35
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•
When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•
When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
36
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
37
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
78 910
11
8
8
8
8
8
38
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
a
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b
Two side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c
Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
d
An electronic control unit that continually
monitors and can record information
about the sensors, the airbag activators,
the seat belt tensioners, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
e
Automatic front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
f
A driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
g
Weight sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
h
Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
i
An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
j
An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k
A rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
39
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
40
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON
(w
*1
.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
Continued
41
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
42
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
43
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Although Honda recommends against
carrying an infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of a child (up to
about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn off the passenger's front
airbag.
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
•
Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•
Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•
Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•
All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•
Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 386
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensor
44
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing
Location
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
45
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
46
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
Continued
47
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the i-MID.
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w
*1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
48
Safe Driving
■ When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant
or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 50
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:
•
An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•
A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
•
The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•
An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. Canada
49
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
50
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
51
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 63
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
52
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 37
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Continued
53
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
54
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
Continued
55
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the
marks.
2. Unlock the seat-back from inside the
trunk, then slightly fold it down.
2 Folding Down the Rear Seats P. 143
3. Remove the head restraint, and store it in
a safe place.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 140
4. Lock the seat-back upright by pushing it
firmly against the trunk panel.
5. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat
then attach the child seat to the lower
anchors according to the instructions that
came with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make
sure that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Reinstall the head restraint when the child seat is
removed.
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
56
Safe Driving
6. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
7. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and
secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
8. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by
the child seat manufacturer.
9. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured
by rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
10. Make sure any unused seat belt that a
child can reach is buckled, the lockable
retractor is activated, and the belt is fully
retracted and locked.
Flexible Type
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
Continued
57
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
58
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
59
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
If you place the child seat in a back seating position,
make sure to remove the head restraint before
securing the child seat.
2 Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
P. 55
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Outer Position
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
Center Position
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
60
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
62
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open both windows and set the heating and cooling system
*
/climate control
system
*
as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
* Not available on all models
63
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator Cap
Doorjambs
U.S. models
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Canadian models
64
65
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 66
intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Warning and Information Messages .....76
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges.............................................. 81
intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-
MID) ................................................ 83
66
Instrument Panel
Indicators
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off if the parking
brake has been released.
●
Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
●
Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
●
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
●
Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 411
●
Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 411
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with a component related to
braking.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
U.S
Canada
(Red)
U.S
Canada
(Amber)
67
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, and
goes off when the engine starts.
●
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●
Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 409
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, and
goes off when the engine starts, or
after several seconds if the engine
did not start. If “readiness codes”
have not been set, it blinks five
times before it goes off.
●
Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
●
Blinks when a misfire in the
engine's cylinders is detected.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 427
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 410
Charging System
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, and
goes off when the engine starts.
●
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn off the
heating and cooling system
*
/climate
control system
*
and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 409
* Not available on all models
68
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
*
●
Indicates the current shift lever
position.
2 Shifting P. 305, 307
—
M (7-speed
manual shift
mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator
*
●
Comes on when 7-speed manual
shift mode is applied.
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 309
—
Transmission
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
* Not available on all models
69
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●
Comes on and the beeper sounds if
you are not wearing a seat belt when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
●
If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on a
few seconds later.
●
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not fastened
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
●
The beeper stops and the indicator
goes off when you and the front
passenger fasten their seat belts.
●
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat
belt - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 31
Low Fuel Indicator
●
Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 1.9 U.S.
gal./7.5 Liter left).
●
Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as
soon as possible.
●
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
If it comes on at any other time, there
is a problem with the ABS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. With this
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-lock
function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
P. 328
70
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
High Temperature
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Blinks when the engine coolant
temperature goes up, and stays on if
the temperature continues to rise.
●
Blinks while driving - Drive slowly to
prevent overheating.
●
Stays on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place and allow the
engine to cool.
2 Overheating P. 407
Low Temperature
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on when the engine coolant
temperature is low.
●
If the indicator stays on after the
engine has reached normal operating
temperature, there may be problem
with the temperature sensors. Have
your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
—
71
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Blinks when VSA® is active.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system or hill start assist
system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 318
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 319
—
Door Open
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if either door is not
completely closed.
●
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if either door is opened
while driving.
●
Goes off when both doors are closed.
Trunk Open
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
,
then goes off.
●
Comes on if the trunk is not
completely closed.
●
Goes off when the trunk is closed.
72
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Electric
Power
Steering
(EPS) System
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w
*1
, and goes off when the
engine starts.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
EPS system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 411
Low Tire
Pressure/
TPMS
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then
goes off.
●
May come on briefly if the ignition switch
is turned to ON
(w
*1
and the vehicle is not
moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the
calibration process is not yet complete.
●
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a
safe place, check tire pressures, and
inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
●
Stays on after the tires are inflated
to the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 322
●
Blinks for about one minute, and then
stays on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
●
Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the
vehicle is fitted with a compact spare,
get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle
as soon as you can.
U.S.
models
73
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
System
Message
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, then
goes off.
●
Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system message on
the i-MID appears at the same time.
●
While the indicator is on, press the
(display/information) button to
see the message again.
●
Refer to the Indicators information in
this chapter when a system message
appears on the i-MID. Take the
appropriate action for the message.
●
The i-MID does not return to the normal
screen unless the warning is canceled,
or the button is pressed.
—
Turn Signal
and Hazard
Warning
Indicators
●
Blink when you operate the turn signal
lever.
●
Blink along with all turn signals when you
press the hazard warning button.
●
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown.
Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs
P. 365, 367
—
High Beam
Indicator
●
Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
— —
Lights On
Indicator
●
Comes on whenever the light switch is on,
or in AUTO
*
when the exterior lights are
on.
●
If you remove the key from the ignition
switch
*1
while the exterior lights are on,
a chime sounds when the driver's door
is opened.
—
Fog Light
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the fog lights are on.
— —
* Not available on all models
74
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●
Comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w
*1
, then
goes off.
●
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●
Blinks - You cannot start the engine.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
,
pull the key out, and then insert the key
and turn it to ON
(w
*1
again.
●
Repeatedly blinks - The system may
be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
—
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●
Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 116
—
Smart Entry
System Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
●
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the smart entry system
or push button starting system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Indicator
* Not available on all models
75
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
ECON Mode
Indicator
*
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, then goes off.
●
Comes on when you press the
ECON button.
2 ECON Button
*
P. 314
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
●
Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.
2 Cruise Control P. 315
—
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator
●
Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control.
2 Cruise Control P. 315
—
i-VTEC Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the i-VTEC system
switches the low RPM cams to the
high RPM cams.
●
When the i-VTEC indicator comes on,
the Rev indicator begins to come on
simultaneously.
2 i-VTEC indicator P. 82
—
Rev Indicators
*
●
Come on when the tachometer
reading approaches the red zone.
2 Rev indicators P. 82
—
Indicator
Indicator
* Not available on all models
76
uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the i-MID. Press the (display/information) button to see the message again with the system
message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2 Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 410
●
Appears if there is a problem with the DRL system.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Daytime Running Lights P. 130
●
Appears when the washer fluid gets low.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 359
●
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
●
Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE
PAST DUE follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the i-MID P. 342
Canadian models
77
uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears when you open the driver's door while the
ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.
●
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, then remove the
key.
●
Appears when you open the driver's door while the
ignition key is in LOCK (0.
●
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
78
uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears after you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.
2 Starting the Engine P. 300
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Models with smart entry system
Continuously
variable
transmission
models
Manual
transmission
models
Except U.S.
models with
continuously
variable
transmission
79
uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in
(P.
●
Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●
Move the shift lever to (P, then press the ENGINE
START/STOP button twice.
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
●
Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 125
●
Appears when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak.
●
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 382
Continuously
variable
transmission
models
U.S. models
Canadian models
80
uuIndicatorsuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID) Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too
weak to start the engine or the key is not within
operating range to start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.
●
Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE
START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 401
●
Appears three seconds after the TO START ENGINE:
BRAKE + PUSH (continuously variable transmission
models)/TO START ENGINE: CLUTCH +PUSH
(manual transmission models) messages appears.
●
Appears three seconds after you bring the smart
entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP
button when TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR
START BUTTON appears. TO START ENGINE:
BRAKE + PUSH (continuously variable transmission
models)/TO START ENGINE: CLUTCH + PUSH
(manual transmission models) appears sequentially.
2 Changing the Power Mode P. 123
●
Appears when the starter system has a problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while
pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
81
Continued
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100km.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Speedometer
■
Tachometer
■
Fuel Gauge
■
Instant Fuel Economy Gauge
*
1Gauges
Press and hold the km/mile change knob until you
hear a beep. The speedometer reading and the
displayed measurements switch between mph and
km/h.
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Instant Fuel Economy Gauge
*
Press and hold the km/mile change knob to switch
the measurement.
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuGauges
82
Instrument Panel
■ i-VTEC indicator
Comes on when the i-VTEC system switches
the low RPM cams to the high RPM cams.
■ Rev indicators
Come on when the tachometer reading
approaches the red zone on a scale of one to
six.
■
i-VTEC and Rev Indicators
*
1Rev indicators
When the fifth indicator (red) comes on, the engine
has reached its maximum output.
When all the indicators are on, the tachometer
reading is on the verge of entering into the red zone.
i-VTEC Indicator
Rev Indicators
* Not available on all models
83
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Continued
Instrument Panel
intelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
The i-MID shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other
gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
■ Main displays
Press the (display/information) button to change the display.
■
Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
To change the item displayed on the fuel
consumption screen:
1. Press and hold the button until the item
blinks.
2. Press the button to select an item while the
item is blinking for about six seconds.
The display is fixed when the time elapses and
blinking stops.
123456
Genre AAA
Song AAA
Artist AAA
200
200
1h 30m
Elapsed Time
1h 30m
Elapsed Time
24.0 24.0
40
mph
Average Speed
40mph
Average Speed
200miles
Range
123456
123456
123456123456
123456
123456 123456
123456 123456
123456
(Display/
Information)
Button
Fuel consumption Audio/HFL display
Fuel consumption
Blank screen
Full size analogue clock/
Wallpaper
2.4 ℓ engine models
Power monitor
1.8 ℓ engine models
Press .
Press and hold
.
Range
Elapsed time
Average speed
Range
Average speed
Elapsed time
Average fuel
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
84
Instrument Panel
■ Trip computer
Press the (SEL/RESET) knob to change the display.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is
reset to 0.0.
■
Odometer
■
Trip Meter
123.4
A
12.3
B
123456123456123456
B
24.0
304040
Odometer
Outside temperature
Trip A
Trip B
SEL/RESET
Knob
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the knob, or by using the customized
features on the i-MID.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Continued
85
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 341
■
Average Fuel Economy
■
Range
■
Elapsed Time
■
Average Speed
■
Engine Oil Life
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 87
You can choose an item to be displayed in the fuel
consumption screen. Average fuel economy, range,
elapsed time, or average speed can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 87
2 Switching the Display P. 83
2.4 ℓ engine models
1Range
You can choose an item to be displayed in the fuel
consumption screen. Range, elapsed time, or average
speed can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 87
2 Switching the Display P. 83
1.8 ℓ engine models
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
86
Instrument Panel
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Use the i-MID's customized features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
Engine horsepower usage while driving is
displayed in the power monitor.
100% indicates that horsepower is at its
maximum.
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■
Outside Temperature
■
Instant Fuel Economy
*
■
Power Monitor
*
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
1Power Monitor
*
Engine horsepower is affected by external conditions
such as driving conditions, or vehicle condition. The
power monitor can compensate for some of these
variables, but different readings may be displayed.
■
Turn-by-Turn Directions
*
1Turn-by-Turn Directions
*
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 87
* Not available on all models
Continued
87
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
Use the i-MID to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
Select the Vehicle Menu screen by pressing the MENU button while the ignition
switch is in ON
(w
*1
, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Select Customize
Settings, then press the SOURCE button.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
(+ / (-
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 91
2 P. 95
MENU
SOURCE
Button
Press to go to the next
display.
SOURCE Button
Press to set your selection.
MENU Button
Press to go to Vehicle
Menu.
(+ Button
Press to scroll upwards.
Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
(- Button
Press to scroll downwards.
88
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
■ Customization flow
Press the MENU button.
1Customized Features
You can exit the customizing screen at any time by
pressing the MENU button.
Vehicle Menu
Vehicle Information
Odometer/Trip Meter
Adjust Clock
*
Maintenance info
Trip Meter Reset
Select Trip/Odometer
* Not available on all models
89
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Display Setup
Trip Computer Setup
Select Wallpaper
*
Import Wallpaper
*
Delete Wallpaper
*
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Trip A reset trigger
Display km/miles
Trip Meter Item to Display
Welcome Screen
Color Theme
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
*
Customize Settings
Turn by Turn Display
*
Trip B reset trigger
TPMS Calibration
*
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
*
Keyless Access Setup
*
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Beep
* Not available on all models
90
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
Lighting Setup
Door Setup
Default All
Auto Light Sensitivity
*
Door Lock Mode
Auto Unlock All Doors
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
Auto Door Lock
Security Relock Timer
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
* Not available on all models
91
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Continued
Instrument Panel
■ List of customizable options
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Vehicle
Information
Maintenance info Resets the Maintenance Minder
TM
. No/Yes
Odometer/
Trip Meter
Trip Meter Reset Resets the trip meter. Trip A/Trip B
Select Trip/Odometer
Switches between odometer, trip meter A, and trip
meter B.
ODO
*1
/Trip A/Trip B
Adjust
Clock
*
Sets time display 12 hour or 24 hour and adjust the time. 12 h
*1
/24 h
Customize
Settings
TPMS Calibration
*
Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Initialize
Display
Setup
Select
Wallpaper
*
Selects the full-size analogue clock or the wallpaper.
Clock
*1
/Image 1/Image 2/
Image 3
Import
Wallpaper
*
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Three images can be stored.
2 Importing Wallpapers
from USB P. 95
Delete
Wallpaper
*
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Image 1/Image 2/Image 3
* Not available on all models
92
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Default Setting
*3: Default Setting for 1.8 ℓ engine models
*4: Default Setting for 2.4 ℓ engine models
*5: Refer to the Navigation System Manual for complete details.
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Customize
Settings
Display
Setup
Trip Meter
Item to
Display
Selects an item to be displayed along with average
fuel economy.
Range
*2
/Elapsed time/
Average speed
Selects an item to be displayed along with the
instant fuel economy.
Average Fuel
*2
/Range/
Elapsed time/Average speed
Welcome
Screen
Selects whether the welcome screen comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
On
*2
/Off
Color Theme Changes the color of the screen. Blue
*3
/Red
*4
/Amber/Gray
Keyless Start
Guidance
Screens
*
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On
*2
/Off
Turn by Turn
Display
*, *5
Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on
during the route guidance.
On
*2
/Off
Language
Selection
Changes the displayed language. English
*2
/French/Spanish
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
* Not available on all models
93
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Customize
Settings
Trip
Computer
Setup
Adjust
Outside
Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C (Canada)
Trip A reset
trigger
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.
With refuel/IGN Off/Manual
only
*1
Trip B reset
trigger
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.
With refuel/IGN Off/Manual
only
*1
Display
km/miles
Changes the displayed measurement on the i-MID. Auto
*1
/km/miles
Fuel
Efficiency
Backlight
*
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Keyless
Access
Setup
*
Keyless
Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either
front door handle.
On
*1
/Off
Door Unlock
Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/All Doors
* Not available on all models
94
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable settings
Customize
Settings
Lighting
Setup
Interior Light
Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight
Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light
Sensitivity
*
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Door
Setup
Auto Door
Lock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
Off/With Vehicle Speed
*1
/
Shift from P
Door Lock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or both doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or ignition key.
Driver Door
*1
/All Doors
Auto Unlock
All Doors
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
Off/When Driver’s Door Opens
*1
/
When Shift to Park
*
/When
Ignition Off
Keyless Lock
Acknowledg-
ment
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On
*1
/Off
Security
Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening either door.
90sec/60sec/30sec
*1
Default
All
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.
Cancel
Reset All Defaults
* Not available on all models
Continued
95
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
■ Example for customizing wallpapers
You can customize the display from clock to wallpaper.
Importing Wallpapers from USB
You can import up to three images, one at a time for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
Select Import Wallpaper from Customize Settings and properly connect a USB
flash drive to store an image.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter
cable.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
2. Press the MEMU button.
3. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE
button.
4. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
1Customized Features
•
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
•
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size was less than 480 x 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•
Up to 255 files can be selected.
•
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
Models with one display
96
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
5. Select Import Wallpaper with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE
button.
u The file names are displayed on the
screen.
6. Press the
(- button until the file name
you want to store appears on the center of
the display, then press the SOURCE
button.
7. The preview of the imported data is
displayed. Press the SOURCE button if it is
OK.
8. Press the SOURCE button to save the
image file.
Save
97
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Continued
Instrument Panel
9. Select the location you want to store the
image file in with the (+ / (- button,
then press the SOURCE button.
10. Press the MENU button to exit the
customize screen.
98
uuGauges and Multi-Information Displayuintelligent Multi-Information Display (i-MID)
Instrument Panel
Selecting a Wallpaper
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
3. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select Select Wallpaper with the
(+ / (-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
5. Select the image file you want with the
(+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
u When the scroll is stopped, the
thumbnail is displayed.
6. Press the MENU button to exit the
customize screen.
99
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 100
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 102
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
..... 104
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 105
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 110
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 112
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 113
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 116
Security System Alarm...................... 116
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 119
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
...... 121
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
*
............................... 122
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*
........... 123
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 126
Turn Signals..................................... 127
Light Switches.................................. 127
Fog Lights
*
...................................... 130
Daytime Running Lights ................... 130
Wipers and Washers ........................ 131
Brightness Control ........................... 132
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button .... 133
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 134
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 135
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 135
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 137
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items
Interior Lights .................................. 145
Interior Convenience Items .............. 147
Heating and Cooling
*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C.......... 152
Climate Control System
*
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 155
Automatic Climate Control Sensors..... 157
* Not available on all models
100
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display, using the CLOCK knob with the ignition
switch in ON
(w
*1
.
■ Using the CLOCK knob
1. Press the CLOCK knob to access the clock
adjustment mode screen.
2. Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the hours.
3. Press the CLOCK knob. The display
switches to minute adjustment.
4. Turn the CLOCK knob to adjust the
minutes.
5. Press the CLOCK knob to complete clock
adjustment.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Adjusting the Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Models with navigation system
Models without display audio
Models without navigation system
CLOCK Knob
Models without display audio
On i-MID
101
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/
information screen
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info.
3. Select Clock Adjustment.
4. Select or to change hour.
5. Select or to change minute, then
select OK.
1Adjusting the Clock
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
The clock display is set to off by factory default.
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
The clock is automatically updated when your
smartphone is connected to the audio system.
Models with display audio
Models with display audio
3
4
3
4
* Not available on all models
102
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the key to start and stop the engine, to
lock and unlock the doors and to open the
trunk. You can also use the remote
transmitter or smart entry system
*
to lock and
unlock the doors and to open the trunk.
■ Smart entry remote
*
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built-
in key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.
■
Master Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 116
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
•
Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•
Keep the keys away from liquids.
•
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
Master Key
*
Smart Entry
Remote
*
Built-in Key
Release Knob
* Not available on all models
103
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■
Valet Key
*
1Valet Key
*
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
* Not available on all models
104
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
Controls
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
*
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
* Not available on all models
105
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, both doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 87
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 145
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
106
Controls
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
u The passenger’s door unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 382
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Continued
107
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
■ Locking the doors and the trunk
Press the door lock button on either door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; both doors and the trunk lock;
and the security system sets.
■
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
Door Lock Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else
with the remote is within range.
•
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
•
If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
•
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle
after two seconds of locking it.
•
The door may not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
•
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
•
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 382
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 87
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
108
Controls
■ Unlocking the doors and the trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the passenger’s door handle:
u Both doors and the trunk unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button
*
P. 114
Trunk Release Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The beep and unlock settings can be customized.
2 Customized Features P. 87
* Not available on all models
109
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward
a
or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b
, and close the door.
■ Locking the passenger's door
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch
*1
, or the smart
entry remote is inside the vehicle.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, the
passenger’s door locks at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
passenger’s door.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Lock
Unlock
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, the passenger’s
door locks at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
110
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, the passenger’s door locks at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
111
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Pull the inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from
the inner handle unlocks both doors.
To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Unlock All Doors setting to Off
using the i-MID.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock both doors.
■
Unlocking Using the Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle
The inner handles are designed to allow front seat
occupants to open the door in one motion. However
this feature requires that front seat occupants never
pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Inner
Handle
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
master lock switch, the passenger’s door locks/
unlocks at the same time.
To Unlock
Master Door
Lock Switch
To Lock
112
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.
■ Drive lock mode
Both doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Driver’s door open mode
Both doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the i-MID.
2 Customized Features P. 87
113
Continued
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62
Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk
Release
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button
*
114
Controls
■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the master
key
*
or built-in key
*
.
Locking the trunk release disables the trunk
button on the smart entry remote and the
trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.
Using the Trunk Release Button
*
Press the release button on the trunk lid after
the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
u The beeper will sound.
1Locking the trunk opener
If you need to give the key to someone else, give
them the remote from which you have removed the
built-in key
*
, or the valet key
*
.
Models with smart entry system
1Using the Trunk Release Button
*
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•
A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
•
Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
•
Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
•
Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
115
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Controls
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
Trunk Button
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
116
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift
lever is moved out of
(P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is
opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w
*1
.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
Continued
117
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK
(0
*1
, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• Both doors are locked with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart entry
system.
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, smart entry system, or the ignition switch is turned to ON
(w
*1
. The
security system indicator goes off at the same time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•
Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
•
Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
•
Opening the hood with the hood release.
•
Moving the shift lever out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
Continuously variable transmission models
118
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Panic Mode
Panic Button
119
Continued
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to
open and close both windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passenger’s window from the
passenger’s side.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
*
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
On
Off
Power Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s Window
Switch
Passenger’s
Window
Switch
* Not available on all models
120
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
121
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
*
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
* Not available on all models
122
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
*
1Ignition Switch
*
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in
(P.
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
When this happens, the following messages appear
on the i-MID:
•
In LOCK (0: REMOVE KEY.
•
In ACCESSORY (q: RETURN IGNITION SWITCH
TO LOCK (0) POSITION The buzzer will stop when
you take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK
(0 to ACCESSORY
(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
3
WARNING
Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
All models
(0
LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON
(w when you let go of
the key.
* Not available on all models
123
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
*
Continued
Controls
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*
*1: Except U.S. models with
continuously variable transmission
■
Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
*
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper
sounds and the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR
START BUTTON message appears on the i-MID.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 401
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Operating Range
Continuously Variable Transmission Manual Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked
*1
.
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.
Press the button without the shift
lever in
(P.
Shift to
(P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without pressing
the clutch pedal
Without pressing
the brake pedal
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.
Indicator
Indicator
Shift to (P.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
124
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
*
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P
*1
and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
*1: Continuously variable transmission models
■
Automatic Power Off
125
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
*
Controls
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the i-MID notifies the driver inside that the
remote is out.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning
buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.
■
Power Mode Reminder
■
Smart Entry Remote Reminder
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.
126
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Controls
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
*1:Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
Ignition Switch
Position
LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)
ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)
Without Smart Entry
System
●
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
●
The steering wheel is
locked
*1
.
●
No electrical
components can be
used.
●
Engine is turned off.
●
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
●
Normal key position
while driving.
●
All electrical components
can be used.
●
Use this position to start
the engine.
●
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.
Power Mode VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)
ACCESSORY ON START
With Smart Entry
System and ENGINE
START/STOP
Button
Indicator-Off
●
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
●
The steering wheel is
locked
*1
.
●
No electrical
components can be
used.
Indicator-On or blinking
●
Engine is turned off.
●
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
Indicator-
On (engine is turned off)
Off (engine is running)
●
All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off
●
The mode automatically
returns to ON after the
engine starts.
Indicator is: On Off
127
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Continued
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w
*1
.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■
Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
with the lights on, a light on reminder chime sounds
when you open the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 73
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
128
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 87
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Automatic Lighting Control
*
1Automatic Lighting Control
*
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Light Sensor
Bright
Dark
* Not available on all models
129
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close the driver's door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 87
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch
is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
*
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
* Not available on all models
130
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
*
Controls
Fog Lights
*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
• The headlight switch is off, or in .
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running
lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Fog Lights
*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator
*
P. 73
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
131
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ Adjusting the delay
*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as
the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY
(q or LOCK (0
*1
, then
remove the obstacle.
Models with adjustment ring
All models
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
*
MIST
INT:
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
Low speed with
intermittent
Long delay
Short delay
* Not available on all models
132
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The i-MID will
return to its original state several seconds after
you adjust the brightness.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the i-MID
while you are adjusting it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the (SEL/RESET) knob or the
(display/information) button switches the display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
Control Knob
00230075°Fmiles
On i-MID
133
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door
mirror button to defog the rear window and
mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 20 minutes.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
Models with heating and cooling system
Models with climate control system
* Not available on all models
134
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Lever
To lock
To adjust
135
Continued
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w
*1
.
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 137
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night Position
Up
Down
Selector
Switch
Adjustment
Switch
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
136
Controls
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
■
Expanded View Driver's Mirror
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
137
Continued
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Driver’s seat is shown.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
138
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Continued
139
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
■
Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
•
Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•
Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•
Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
140
Controls
A passenger sitting in a back seating position
should adjust the height of their head restraint
to an appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■
Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
To remove the rear outer head restraints, fold down
the seat-back first.
2 Folding Down the Rear Seats P. 143
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
Continued
141
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Controls
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
■
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
142
Controls
Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever tilts the seat-back forward.
Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever, or pushing down the front passenger
seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back
forward.
You can also use these levers to move the seat
forward.
■
Rear Seat Access
1Rear Seat Access
When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip
over the front seat belt.
If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the
seat-back forward.
Seat-back
Angle
Adjustment
Lever
Driver side
Driver side
Seat-back
Angle
Adjustment
Lever
Front
Passenger
Seat-back
Release
Lever
Passenger side
Passenger side
143
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Rear Seats
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
3. Fold the seat-back down.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 140
■
Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seat-back(s
*
) can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62
To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it
locks.
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 48
Make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.
Guide
Center
Shoulder
Belt
Release
Lever
*
Release Lever
* Not available on all models
144
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Slide the armrest to a desired position.
■
Using the Front Seat Armrest
145
Continued
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When either of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.
• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
•
When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
•
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 87
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•
When you lock the driver's door.
•
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w
*1
.
•
When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
•
When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave either door open without the key in the
ignition switch
*1
, the interior lights go off after about
15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE
START/STOP
button instead of an ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Door Activated Position
Off
Front
Door Activated Position
On
Off
Rear
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
147
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
■
Console Compartment
148
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Press on the upper edge to open the pocket.
■
Center Pocket
Continued
149
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
150
Controls
The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w
*1
.
Open the cover to use it.
There are coat hooks behind the center pillar
on both sides. Pull them down to use them.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Accessory Power Socket
1Accessory Power Socket
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
■
Coat Hooks
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.
151
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The ignition switch must be in ON (w
*1
to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Seat Heaters
*
1Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
152
Controls
Heating and Cooling
*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
Mode Buttons
Change airflow.
Floor and defroster vents
Floor vents
Dashboard and floor vents
Dashboard vents
Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan speed.
Rotate the dial all the
way to OFF to turn
everything off.
Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the dashboard vents, and
switches the mode to recirculation.
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Press to cool the interior or dehumidify
while heating.
Windshield Defroster
Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the defroster vents at the
base of the windshield, and
switches the mode to fresh air.
Temperature Control Dial
Adjusts the interior temperature.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the button and switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
* Not available on all models
Continued
153
uuHeating and Cooling
*
uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
The heater uses engine coolant to warm the
air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
■ To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select .
3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
4. Press the button (the indicator on).
■ To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
■
Heating
1Heating
When you select , the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.
1To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.
uuHeating and Cooling
*
uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
154
Controls
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).
■ To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the button (the indicator on).
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the button.
3. Press the button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
■
Cooling
*
1To rapidly cool down the interior
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
Pressing the button bypasses the ECON mode
control, and cools down the interior more rapidly.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
* Not available on all models
155
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
*
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that were pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
(ON/OFF) Button
(Recirculation) Button
Floor and
defroster
vents
Floor ventsDashboard
and floor
vents
Dashboard
vents
AUTO Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Temperature
Control Dial
Fan Control
Dial
* Not available on all models
uuClimate Control System
*
uUsing Automatic Climate Control
156
Controls
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Pressing the (windshield defroster) button
turns the air conditioning system on and
automatically switches the system to fresh air
mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Using Automatic Climate Control
Pressing the button switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.
While in the ECON mode, the climate control system
has greater temperature fluctuations.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
157
uuClimate Control System
*
uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
uuClimate Control System
*
uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
158
Controls
159
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 160
USB/HDMI® Port
*
............................. 161
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 162
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
........................ 162
Audio System Theft Protection
*
....... 163
Audio Remote Controls.................... 164
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 166
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 167
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 168
Playing a CD .................................... 171
Models with one display
Playing an iPod ................................ 174
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 177
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 179
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 182
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 184
Audio/Information Screen ................ 185
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 189
Display Setup ................................... 190
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 191
Playing a CD .................................... 194
Playing an iPod ................................ 197
Models with display audio system
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 200
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 202
Playing Bluetoo th® Audio ................ 205
Playing a Video Using the HDMI® ..... 207
Smartphone Apps............................ 209
Siri Eyes Free.................................... 210
Audio Error Messages ...................... 211
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 217
Customized Features
*
...................... 220
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 233, 264
* Not available on all models
160
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
On models with navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for operation
of the audio system, Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these
features.
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the icons on the touchscreen interface
*
.
1About Your Audio System
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
Remote Control
iPod
USB Flash
Drive
iPod
HDMI
USB
Flash Drive
* Not available on all models
161
uuAudio SystemuUSB/HDMI® Port
*
Features
USB/HDMI® Port
*
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
3. Install the HDMI® cable to the HDMI® port.
1USB/HDMI® Port
*
•
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
* Not available on all models
162
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
Features
USB Adapter Cable
1. Lift the armrest and unclip the USB
connector cable.
2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB connector.
Auxiliary Input Jack
*
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1USB Adapter Cable
•
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•
Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
•
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
•
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
*
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.
* Not available on all models
163
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
*
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
*
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display ENTER CODE
*1
/Enter Code
*2
.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*3
.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
*1: Models with one display
*2: Models with the display audio system
*3: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
164
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM AM CD USB iPod Bluetooth®
Audio Pandora®
*
aha
*
Apps
*,*1
AUX HDMI®
*
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press
(+: To increase the volume.
Press (-: To decrease the volume.
Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Internet radio
*
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.
*1: Appears only when connected to HondaLink
TM
.
1Audio Remote Controls
The CD or AUX mode appears only when a CD is
loaded or AUX
*
/HDMI®
*
device is connected.
Pandora® and Bluetooth® Audio appear when a
connection (Bluetooth® or USB) is established with a
device.
SOURCE Button
(+ Button
(- Button
Button
Button
MENU Button
* Not available on all models
165
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Steering Wheel MENU Button
• When listening to the radio
Press and hold the MENU button: To select the radio station by Scan, Save
Preset, or Seek.
• When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press and hold the MENU button: To select the song by Scan, Repeat, or
Random.
• When listening to an iPod
Press and hold the MENU button: To select the song by Repeat or Shuffle.
• When listening to Internet radio
*
Press and hold the MENU button: To select Bookmark, or Play/Pause.
• When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold the MENU button: To select Pause or Play for the song.
1Audio Remote Controls
The MENU button is available only when the audio
mode is FM, AM, CD, USB, iPod, Pandora®, Aha
TM
, or
Bluetooth® Audio.
Models with display audio system
* Not available on all models
166
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON
(w
*1
.
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as Auto Select, RDS Information, Sound
Settings, Play Mode, and Resume/Pause.
button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Models with one display
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Press the SOURCE,
(+, (-, or button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 164
SETUP Menu Items
2 Auto Select P. 169
2 RDS Information P. 170
2 Sound Settings P. 167
2 Play Mode P. 173
2 Resume/Pause P. 183
Button
Selector
Knob
SETUP
Button
Sound Settings
Menu Display
167
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SETUP button, and rotate to
select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Auto Select
TREBLE is selectable.
Selector
Knob
SETUP
Button
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Subwoofer
*
* Not available on all models
168
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
00230075°
F miles
FM Button
/ Button
Press to display and select an
RDS category.
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the
strongest stations on the
selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the
button again.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press to search up and down
the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
AM Button
Press to select a band.
Continued
169
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in
each preset.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Auto Select, then press
.
To turn off auto select, press again. This
restores the presets you originally set.
■
Auto Select
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 164
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
into the preset memory.
Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM
stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal
into the preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
Sound Settings
170
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■ RDS Information
1. Press the SETUP button and rotate to
select RDS Information.
2. Each time you press , the RDS
Information switches between on and off.
■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the / button to display and
select an RDS category.
2. Use SEEK/SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS
station.
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
####-FM
Jazz
RDS Category
171
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
/ Button
Press to skip to the next
folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder in MP3 or WMA.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each song.
●
Press to sample all tracks
on the CD (all files in the
current folder in MP3 or
WMA).
●
Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders (MP3 or
WMA).
●
To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change
tracks (files in MP3 or WMA).
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
172
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unsupported, then skips
to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•
When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•
When you change the audio mode to CD.
•
When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
00230075°
F miles
Genre AAA
1’23’’
Track AAA
Artist AAA
Folder CCC
Folder AAA
Folder BBB
Track CCC
Track AAA
Track BBB
Folder Selection
Track Selection
173
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
setting mode.
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA): Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random in Disc: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Sound Settings
Play Mode
Items
174
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
123456
Genre AAA
Song AAA
Artist AAA
/ Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
Press to set your selection.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change
songs.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
Album Art
USB Indicator
Comes on when an iPod is
connected.
Continued
175
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Press to display the iPod menu.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
3. Press to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
■
How to Select a File from the iPod Menu
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the i-MID.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 212
123456
Genre AAA
Song AAA
Artist AAA
Artist AAA
Artist BBB
All
iPod Menu
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
176
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Shuffle Off: Turns off the shuffle mode.
Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Repeat Off: Turns off the repeat mode.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Off
Shuffle
Normal Play
Sound Settings
Play Mode
Items
177
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Continued
Features
Playing Internet Radio
Activate Pandora®, and connect the iPhone using your dock connector to the USB
adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
U.S. models
iPhone use only
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
AUX Button
Press to select iPhone (if connected
when the Pandora® application is
activated).
SKIP Button
Press to skip a song.
SETUP Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to enter PANDORA MENU.
Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Album Art
Rating Icon
/ Button
Press to the next station.
Press to the previous station.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
178
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Station List (QuickMix is also available)
• Like (Thumbs-up)
• Dislike (Thumbs-down)
• Resume/Pause
• Skip
• Bookmark this song
• Bookmark this artist
■ Operating a menu item
1. Press to display the PANDORA MENU.
2. Rotate to select a menu.
3. Press to display the items on that menu.
■
Pandora® Menu
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the i-MID.
2 Pandora® P. 214
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
179
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
00230075°F miles
Genre AAA
1’23’’
File AAA
Artist AAA
123 456
/ Button
Press to skip to the next
folder, and to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each file.
●
Press to sample all files in
the current folder.
●
Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders.
●
To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to change files.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
USB Indicator
Comes on when a USB flash drive
is connected.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
180
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■
How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 217
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the i-MID.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 212
455:File CCC
456:File AAA
454:File BBB
122:Folder CCC
123:Folder AAA
121:Folder BBB
00230075°
F miles
Genre AAA
1’23’’
File AAA
Artist AAA
123 456
Folder Selection
Track Selection
181
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file(s).
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate to select Normal Play, then press .
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Sound Settings
Play Mode
Items
182
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
123456
Genre AAA
File AAA
Artist AAA
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
SETUP Button
Press to display
menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Press to display the
device’s name.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press or to
change files.
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when
your phone is
connected to HFL.
183
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Sound Settings
184
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
HOME: Select to go to the HOME screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 185
MENU: Touch to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Music Search,
and play modes. Play modes can be also
selected from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so
on.
BACK: Select to go back to the previous
display when it is displayed.
button:
Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press once and select
(- or (+ to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Models with display audio system
1Audio System Basic Operation
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 192
2 Music Search P. 195, 198, 203, 206
2 Random/Repeat P. 196, 204
2 Scan P. 193, 196, 204
ButtonHOME
BACK
MENU
185
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
Select HOME to go to the HOME screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, or HondaLink.
■
Switching the Display
HOME Screen
186
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 264
■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer, Clock/Wallpaper, Voice Info, or System/Device
Information information.
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
■ HondaLink Apps
Connects with your smartphone
*1
to play personalized music information, and social
media streams.
2 Smartphone Apps P. 209
*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for compatible phones
and hondalink.com for feature details.
* Not available on all models
Continued
187
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port
or the USB adapter cable.
2 USB/HDMI® Port
*
P. 161
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select Info.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the
Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
•
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
•
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•
The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
•
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•
Up to 255 files can be selected.
•
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
188
Features
■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings screen.
2. Select Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings screen.
2. Select Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a
preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
BACK.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.
189
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select Sound.
Select the tabs to adjust the following choices:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SUBW
(Subwoofer)
*
, SVC (Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation)
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
* Not available on all models
190
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
2. Select System.
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Select Display Settings.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select OK.
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
2. Select System.
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Select Background Color.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select OK.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Display Setup
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
191
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
00230075°Fmiles
Audio/Information Screen
Tune Icons
Select or to tune the radio
frequency.
BACK
Select to go back to the previous
display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
Select to display preset 7 onwards.
MENU
Select to display the menu items.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
Scan
Select to scan each station with a
strong signal.
Seek Icons
Select or to search up
and down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
192
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.
1. Select open/close icon to display a channel list.
2. Select Preset tab.
3. Press and hold the preset number for the station you want to store until you hear
a beep.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select MENU while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Station List.
3. Select a station.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select MENU while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Station List.
3. Select Refresh.
■
Preset Memory
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the list.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 164
You can also switch the mode by selecting Change
Source on the MENU screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
193
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select View Radio Text.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel.
194
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC
*1
format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
ᵎᵏᴾᵤᶇᶊᶃᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵟᶐᶒᶇᶑᶒᴾᵟᵟᵟ ᵟᶊᶀᶓᶋᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵎᵏᴾᵤᶍᶊᶂᶃᶐᴾᵟᵟᵟ
Audio/Information Screen
BACK
Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
MENU
Select to display the menu items.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD
slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Open/Close Icon
*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
Continued
195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/
AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•
When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•
When you change the audio mode to CD.
•
When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
196
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port or the USB adapter
cable, then select the iPod mode.
2 USB/HDMI® Port
*
P. 161
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
ᵥᶃᶌᶐᶃᴾᵟᵟᵟᵟᶐᶒᶇᶑᶒᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵎᵏᴾᵱᶍᶌᶅᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵟᶊᶀᶓᶋᴾᵟᵟᵟ
123456
Genre AAA
Song AAA
Artist AAA
Audio/Information Screen
BACK
Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
Song Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a
song.
MENU
Select to display the menu items.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
198
Features
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 212
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the display audio
system, you may no longer be able to operate the
same app on the display audio. Reconnect the device
if necessary.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
Continued
199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle: Plays all available albums in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
200
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port or the
USB adapter cable.
Select Source to select Pandora mode.
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
iPhone only
Audio/Information Screen
BACK
Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
MENU
Select to display the menu items.
(Power) Button
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Bookmark
• Station List
• Change Station
• Change Source
• Sound
■ Operating a menu item
1. Select MENU.
2. Select an item.
■
Pandora® Menu
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 214
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
202
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC
*1
format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port or the USB adapter cable, then select the USB mode.
2 USB/HDMI® Port
*
P. 161
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 162
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2: Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
00230075°F miles
Genre AAA
1’23’’
File AAA
Artist AAA
123 456
Audio/Information Screen
BACK
Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
MENU
Select to display the menu items.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder, and
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon
*2
Displays/hides the detailed information.
* Not available on all models
Continued
203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 217
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 212
Folder Selection
Track Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
204
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically linked.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
A NO CONNECT message may be displayed if:
•
The phone is not linked to HFL.
•
The phone is not turned on.
•
The phone is not in the vehicle.
•
An incompatible phone is connected.
The following functions may not be available on
some devices:
•
Pause function
•
Group selection
*1: Depending on the Bluetooth® device you
connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
ᵟᶐᶒᶇᶑᶒᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵟᶊᶀᶓᶋᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵎᵏᴾᵤᶇᶊᶃᴾᵟᵟᵟ
ᵮᶆᶍᶌᶃᴾᵟᵟᵟ
▲
▲
00230075°F miles
123456
Genre AAA
File AAA
Artist AAA
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks.
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Audio/Information
Screen
Play Icon
Pause Icon
BACK
Select to go back to the
previous display.
MENU
Select to display the menu items.
Group Icons
Select or to change group.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon
*1
Displays/hides the
detailed
information.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
206
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play icon or pause icon.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
▲
▲
■
Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a Video Using the HDMI®
Continued
Features
Playing a Video Using the HDMI®
Your audio system allows you to play videos from an HDMI®-compatible device.
Connect the device, using an HDMI® cable, then select the HDMI® mode.
2 USB/HDMI® Port
*
P. 161
Audio/Information Screen
BACK
Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume)
Select to adjust the volume.
MENU
Select to display the menu
items.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a Video Using the HDMI®
208
Features
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select Aspect Ratio Adjustment.
4. Select the setting you want.
5. Select OK.
■
Changing the Screen Aspect
1Playing a Video Using the HDMI®
This feature is limited while driving. To play videos,
stop your vehicle and apply the parking brake.
209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmartphone Apps
Features
Smartphone Apps
You can connect a compatible smartphone to the system to enable integration
between the smartphone's approved apps and the vehicle. This allows you to
control the phone through the vehicle display. To check smart phone compatibility,
download the HondaLink app, and view connection instructions, visit
handsfreelink.honda.com. For the latest apps and feature details, check
hondalink.com.
1Smartphone Apps
Park in a safe place before connecting your phone
and while operating the displayed apps.
Not all phones and apps are compatible with the
system. The system does not display all the available
apps on smartphone, and some apps need to be
preinstalled. Ask a dealer for details.
You need to switch the Bluetooth connection to your
smartphone if another electronic device is connected.
2 Changing the currently paired phone
P. 271
The following may vary by phone type:
•
Apps that can be operated on the screen.
•
How to connect a smartphone to the system.
•
Display response time/update time.
We do not support every app operation on the
display audio.
Ask the app provider for any questions on the app’s
features.
MENU
Select to display the
menu on the app you
selected. (Not
available on all apps.)
BACK
Select to go back to the previous display.
(Not available on all phones.)
HOME
Select to go back to
HOME or to a previous
display.
Microphones
210
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Features
Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the Talk button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is
paired to Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
■
Using Eyes Free
1Siri Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
When operating the vehicle, only use Siri through the
Talk button.
1Using Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate Siri.
While in Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Eyes Free
211
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with display audio system
Error Message Cause Solution
Heat Error High temperature
●
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
Unsupported
*1
Unplayable File
*2
Track/file format not supported
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
Bad Disc
Please Check Owners Manual
Push Eject
Mechanical error
●
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that
the error message is cleared.
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 218
●
If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
●
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
●
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Mecha Error
Bad Disc
Please Check Owners Manual
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 218
212
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Bad USB Device
Please Check Owners
Manual.
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No Song Appears when the iPod is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Ver
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Retry Connection Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
Models with one display
213
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Error Message Solution
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
The connected USB device
has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
Models with display audio system
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
214
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
PANDORA No Station Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA Requires Update Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Please update the device application.
PANDORA Unavailable Appears when Pandora is performing system maintenance. Try again later.
PANDORA Cannot Connect Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.
PANDORA Loading... Appears when Pandora is loading.
U.S. models
Models with one display
215
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Continued
Features
Error Message Solution
The maximum number of stations that can be created is
100.
To create more, please delete one or more previously
created stations.
●
Appears when the number of stations that can be created is
exceeded. Follow the message.
Unable to create new station. Please try again.
●
Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Unable to save bookmark.
This Pandora station is currently not available. Please select
another station.
●
Appears when the station you selected is not available. Change a
station, or try again later.
Unable to play Pandora. When stopped, log-in to Pandora.
●
Appears when you have not logged into Pandora®. Follow the
message.
Unable to connect to Pandora. When stopped, check your
mobile phone.
●
Appears when failed to connect. Check your device and try again.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Connect Retry
Models with display audio system
216
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Error Message Solution
Unsupported
●
Appears when the device is not supported. Use another device.
Unsupported Version
●
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.
Pandora App version is not supported
Unable to connect to the phone.
Please make sure the phone’s Bluetooth setting is ON and
try again.
●
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check the
Bluetooth status on your device.
No Data
●
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual
●
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No station list on device.
Use device to create station.
●
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Create one on
your device.
No Stations stored in Pandora App
●
Appears when there is no station on app. Store some.
The maximum number of tracks that can be skipped per
hour has been reached.
●
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
predetermined number of times in an hour.
Models with display audio system
217
Continued
Features
General Information on the Audio System
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3 or WMA formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■
CDs with MP3 or WMA files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
218
Features
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●
Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●
Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
219
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod and USB Flash Drives
*1:Models with display audio system
• Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano
iPod touch
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5
*1
■
USB Flash Drives
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
220
Features
Customized Features
*
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, select Settings,
then select a setting item.
1Customized Features
*
When you customize settings:
•
Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
Shift to (P.
•
Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 224
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
221
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Continued
Features
■ Customization flow
Clock Format
Remember Last Screen
Factory Data Reset
Clock Adjustment
Select Settings.
Language
Default
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Clock
Wallpaper
Display
Home Screen Edit Order
Background Color
Volume
Sync Clock With Smartphone
*
Clock Location
Clock Display
Beep Volume
Keyboard Layout
Home
Sound/Beep
Display Settings
Clock
Clock/Wallpaper Type
System
Clock Reset
*
Others
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
Voice Prompt
Volume
Voice Recog.
Voice Command Tips
* Not available on all models
222
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Features
Color
Audio Sound
Audio Source Pop-up
[Your selected media] Cover Art
*1
Display Adjustment
*1
Aspect Ratio Adjustment
*1
Change Bluetooth Audio Device
*1
Bluetooth Device List
*1
Default
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Clock Format
Clock Adjustment
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock
Wallpaper
Sync Clock With Smartphone
*
Clock Location
Clock Display
Info Screen Preference
Default
Clock/Info
Clock Reset
*
Other
Clock
*1: May change depending on your currently
selected source.
* Not available on all models
223
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Continued
Features
Ring Tone
Edit Speed Dial
Connect Phone
Phone
Default
Automatic Phone Sync
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth Device List
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Camera
Bluetooth On/Off Status
Default
Bluetooth
Default
HondaLink Assist
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification
LaneWatch
*
Show with Turn Signal
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line
Default
Bluetooth
Phone
Text/Email
* Not available on all models
224
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Features
■ List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Home Home Screen Edit Order Changes the HOME screen icon layout. —
Display
Display
Settings
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Blue
*1
/Amber/Red/
Violet
Sound/
Beep
Volume Changes the sound volume. 0~6
*1
~11
Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off
*1
/1/2/3
Voice
Recog.
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On
*1
/Off
Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 0~6
*1
~11
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. —
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On
*1
/Off
225
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Changes the clock display type.
Analog/Digital
*1
/
Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
●
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 187
Blank/Galaxy
*1
/
Metallic
Clock Adjustment
Adjusts Clock.
2 Clock P. 100
—
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On/Off
*1
Clock Location Changes the clock display layout.
Right upper
*1
/Left
upper/Right lower/
Left lower/Off
Sync Clock With
Smartphone
*
Selects whether the clock links to the device you
connect.
On
*1
/Off
Clock Reset
*
Cancels/Resets all customized items for clock
display as default.
Yes/No
* Not available on all models
226
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Others
Language Changes the display language.
English
*1
/French/
Spanish
Keyboard Layout Selects the on-screen keyboard type. Alphabet/QWERTY
*1
Voice Command Tips
Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.
On
*1
/Off
Remember Last Screen
Selects whether the device remembers the last
screen.
On/Off
*1
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 232
Yes/No
Default
Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System group as default.
Yes/No
Audio
Sound
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 167
-6 ~ 0
*1
~ +6 (BASS,
TREBLE, and SUBW
*
),
RR9~0
*1
~FR9
(FADER), L9~0
*1
~R9
(BALANCE), Off/Low/
Mid
*1
/High (SVC)
Audio Source Pop-up
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when Audio is selected on the
HOME screen.
On/Off
*1
* Not available on all models
227
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
[Your selected media] Cover Art
Turns on and off the cover art display. On
*1
/Off
Display
Adjustment
Display
Brightness
See System on P. 226Contrast
Black Level
Color
Color
Changes the color of the audio/information
screen.
—
Tint Changes the tint of the audio/information screen. —
Aspect Ratio Adjustment
Changes the aspect ratio and zoom settings of
the audio/information screen.
Normal/Full
*1
/Zoom
Change Bluetooth Audio Device
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
—
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
group as default.
Yes/No
iPod or USB mode
HDMI® mode
HDMI® mode
Bluetooth® Audio mode
Bluetooth® Audio mode
228
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Clock/
Info
Clock
Clock/Wall-
paper type
Clock
See System on P. 226
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Clock Display
Clock Location
Sync Clock With
Smartphone
*
Clock Reset
*
Other Info Screen Preference Changes the Info Screen type.
Info Top/Info Menu/
Off
*1
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
group as default.
Yes/No
* Not available on all models
229
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Phone
Connect Phone
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a
paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
—
Bluetooth
Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
—
Edit Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 250
—
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone
*1
Automatic
Phone Sync
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically imported
when a phone is paired to HFL.
On/Off
HondaLink
Assist
Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off
*1
Text/Email
Enable Text/
Email
Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On
*1
/Off
Select Account Selects a mail or text message account. —
New Message
Notification
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen
when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.
On/Off
*1
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone and
Text/Email groups as default.
Yes/No
230
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear
Camera
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.
Yes/No
Lane-
Watch
*
Show with Turn Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.
On
*1
/Off
Display Time after Turn
Signal Off
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch
display stays on after you pull the turn signal lever
back.
0 second
*1
/2 seconds
Reference Lines
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.
On
*1
/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.
Yes/No
* Not available on all models
231
uuCustomized Features
*
u
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth On/Off Status Changes the Bluetooth® status. On
*1
/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 240
—
Edit Pairing Code
Edits Pairing Code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 271
Random/Fixed
*1
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth group as default.
Yes/No
232
uuCustomized Features
*
uDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select System.
u Repeat the procedure to select Others
tab, then Factory Data Reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Select Yes to reset the settings.
4. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Select OK.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
•
Audio preset settings
•
Phonebook entries
•
Other display and personal settings.
233
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for how
to operate the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528 -7876.
Voice control tips
•
Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•
Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up
Button
Volume
down
Selector
Knob
PHONE
Button
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
234
Features
The i-MID notifies you when there is an
incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 250
■
HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
John
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Roam Status
Call Name
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the i-MID varies
between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 87
Disabled Options
235
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w
*1
to use HFL.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
Display your speed dial entry lists.
(up to 15 entries per paired phone)
Display the last 20
outgoing calls.
Display the last 20
incoming calls.
Display the last 20
missed calls.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
Phone
Speed Dial
*2
Call History
*2
PHONE or
Phonebook
*2
Dial
*2
Dialed Calls
Received Calls
Missed Calls
236
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1:Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
System reads received message aloud,
or stop message from being read.
Reply to a received message using one
of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
See an entire received message
(if more than three lines of text).
Redial
*1
Message is
read aloud.
Text Message
Read/Stop reading
Reply
Call
Display Message
Select message and .
237
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the
system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Create a code for a paired phone.
Connection
Phone Setup
Add a New Phone
Connect a Phone
Disconnect Phone
Delete a Phone
Pairing Code
238
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1:Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Add New
Existing entry list
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Speed Dial
*1
Phonebook
Call History
Phone Number
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Delete Voice Tag
Change Voice Tag
239
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1:Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.
Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.
Prioritize the caller’s phone number as
the caller ID.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and
security codes.
System Clear
Auto Transfer
Caller ID Info
Passcode
*1
Name Priority
Number Priority
Turn incoming text message notifications on or off.
Message Notice
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
240
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
00230075°
F miles
PHONE#1
PHONE#1
241
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Add a New Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to Select Location.
5. Rotate to select Empty, then press .
00230075°
F miles
Connect a Phone
Add a New Phone
Speed Dial
Connection
PHONE#4
PHONE#5
242
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
6. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
7. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
8. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
9. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
00230075°
F miles
PHONE#6
PHONE#2
PHONE#2
Continued
243
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
u Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
2. Rotate to select Connection, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Pairing Code, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Fixed or Random, then
press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
00230075°
F miles
Speed Dial
Connection
Pairing Code
Delete a Phone
244
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Connection, then Delete a Phone.
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
u You will receive a notification on the
screen if it is successful.
00230075°
F miles
2 PHONE#4
1 PHONE#3
3 PHONE#5
Pairing Code
Delete a Phone
Disconnect Phone
Continued
245
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Message Notice, then
press .
4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
■
To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
1To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
246
Features
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Passcode.
3. Select a phone you want to add a security
PIN to.
u Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen.
u Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate to select, then press . Press
to delete. Press to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
2.
■
To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
00230075°
F miles
PHONE#4
PHONE#3
PHONE#5
Continued
247
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Caller ID
Info.
3. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
■
Automatic Transferring
■
Caller’s ID Information
1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority mode: A caller’s name is displayed if it
is stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority mode: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.
248
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tag, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select System
Clear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
4. You will receive a notification message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Press to finish.
■
To Clear the System
00230075°
F miles
Continued
249
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Car
Fax
Message
Other
Voice
222222####
111111####
333333####
John
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
250
Features
Up to 15 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial, then Add New.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
By Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
By Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
By Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
00230075°
F miles
Phone Number
Continued
251
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
252
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
Delete Voice Tag
Change Voice Tag
Continued
253
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
254
Features
■ To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically
imported to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press
.
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
with a voice tag using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 234
2 Speed Dial P. 250
222222####
111111####
333333####
John
Jane
Mat
John
Continued
255
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
with a voice tag using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 234
2 Speed Dial P. 250
012345####
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
256
Features
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select More Speed Dial Lists to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 250
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
Continued
257
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
John
HFL Mode
Caller Name
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
258
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
John
0’50”
0’50”
Continued
259
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Rotate to select Yes to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
the button.
■
Receiving a Text Message
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 263
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
260
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■
Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 263
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
Continued
261
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Using the stop reading or read option
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Stop Reading or
Read, then press .
1Using the stop reading or read option
This option changes to:
•
Stop Reading while the text message is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read-
out.
•
Read when you go to the Text Message menu, or
after you selected Stop Reading. Select this option
to hear the system reading out the selected
message.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
262
Features
■ Reply to a message
You can reply to a message using one of the
six common phrases available in the system.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
6. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press .
7. The reply message you selected is displayed.
Select Yes to send the message.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•
Talk to you later, I'm driving.
•
I am on my way.
•
I'm running late.
•
OK
•
Yes
•
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
After you reply, the following is displayed:
263
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
You can call the text message sender.
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Call, then press .
u HFL begins dialing.
■ Displaying an entire message
1. Press the PHONE button or the button.
2. Rotate to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press to enter the Text Message
Menu.
5. Rotate to select Display Message,
then press .
6. Rotate to scroll down and display the
entire message.
264
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for how
to operate the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•
U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
•
Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status
setting must be On.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
Voice control tips
•
Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
•
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•
To change the volume level, select the audio
system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
Up to six speed dial entries can be display among a
total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entries
in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 277
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Models with display audio system
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphones
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up Button
Volume down
SOURCE Button
MENU Button
Button
Button
* Not available on all models
265
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen, or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
MENU button: Press and hold to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on
the Phone screen.
button: Press to select an item displayed on the Phone screen.
SOURCE button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the Phone
screen.
To go to the Phone menu screen:
1. Select Phone to switch the display to the Phone screen.
2. Select MENU.
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
■
HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French or Spanish.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your phone
is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level
Status
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
* Not available on all models
266
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
■ Phone settings screen
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Phone.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
Pair a phone to the system.
Edit a previously paired phone name.
Connect
Phone
*1
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth Device
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
(Existing entry list)
*1
Edit Device Name
Delete This Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
Add Bluetooth Device
*1:
Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
Pair a phone to the system.
Phone
267
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
Manual Input
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Edit
Delete
(Existing entry list)
Edit Speed
Dial
*1
Delete All
Enter a phone number to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial
number.
Edit a previously stored speed dial
number.
●
Change a name.
●
Change a number.
●
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
Ring Tone
Select the ring tone.
Automatic
Phone Sync
*1
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
HondaLink
Assist
*1
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.
Text/Email
Enable Text/Email
Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select Account
Select a mail or text message account.
New Message
Notification
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.
Default
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone and Text/Email groups as default.
268
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Phone menu screen
1. Select Phone.
2. Select MENU.
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Call History
*1
Speed Dial
*1
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
Missed
Display the last 20 missed calls.
Dial
*1
Redial
*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Phonebook
*1
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
269
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
Text/Email
*1
Select Account
Select a mail or text message account.
Message is read
aloud.
See the previous message.
Read/Stop
Previous
Next
See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or stop
message from being read.
Select a message.
Reply
Reply to a received message using one of six
fixed phrases.
Call
Make a call to the sender.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
270
Features
■ To pair a mobile phone (when there is
no phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then select Continue.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone not found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, search for
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•
You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•
Up to six phones can be paired.
•
Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
•
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system, the system will return to the
previous screen.
Continued
271
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Changing the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Connect Phone.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the current phone and
starts searching for another paired
phone.
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Bluetooth.
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth tab, then Edit Pairing Code.
3. Select Fixed or Random.
1Changing the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is reconnected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device
from the Connect Phone screen.
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
272
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To edit an already-paired phone name
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Bluetooth Device
List.
3. Select a paired phone you want to edit.
4. Select Edit Device Name.
5. Edit the name and select OK.
6. A notification appears if the change is
successful.
273
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Bluetooth Device
List.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete This Device.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
6. A notification appears if the deletion is
successful.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
274
Features
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/
Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■
To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
Continued
275
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.
■
Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
276
Features
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Automatic Phone
Sync.
3. Select On or Off.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
Pref
Continued
277
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Speed Dial.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Select a place to choose a number.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or
No.
5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the
speed dial entry.
■
Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag
name.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
278
Features
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record to store the voice tag.
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
Continued
279
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from most screens.
Press the button and say the voice tag name.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
280
Features
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering letters.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
4. Select .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 277
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 277
Continued
281
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.
1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)
1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 277
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
282
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
The available options appear on the screen during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to
your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call.
This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the touch screen instead
of the and buttons.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the touch screen.
ᵁᵁᵁᵁᵁᵁᵁᵁ
Mute Icon
Continued
283
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL can display newly received text and e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text/e-mail message.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text/e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.
■
Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text and e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text/e-mail message for the first
time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked
to turn the New Message Notification setting to
On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 274
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
284
Features
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Message or an e-mail account
you want.
■
Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Continued
285
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Displaying text messages
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■
Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select Previous
or Next on the message screen.
Message List
Text Message
286
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 268
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
Folder List
Message List
E-mail
Continued
287
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 285
2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read to start reading the message
from the beginning.
■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 285
2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•
Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•
I’m on my way.
•
I’m running late.
•
OK
•
Yes
•
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
288
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.
289
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. Once
connected, information about your vehicle, its
positioning, and its condition will be sent to
the operator; you also can speak to the
operator when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
■ To enable notification
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 266
2. Select Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■
In Case of Emergency
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use emergency services when:
•
You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
•
There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other navigation- or phone-
related functions using the screens while talking to
the operator.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
•
On: Notification is available.
•
Off: Disable the feature.
290
291
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 292
Maximum Load Limit........................ 295
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle........................ 297
When Driving
Starting the Engine .................. 298, 300
Precautions While Driving................. 303
Continuously Variable Transmission.. 304
Shifting............................ 305, 307, 311
ECON Button
*
................................. 314
Cruise Control ................................. 315
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
®
), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............... 318
LaneWatch
TM
*
.......................................... 320
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 322
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ............. 324
Braking
Brake System ................................... 326
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 328
Brake Assist System.......................... 329
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 330
Rearview Camera
*
............................ 331
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 332
How to Refuel ................................. 333
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 335
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 336
Modifications................................... 336
* Not available on all models
292
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 372
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.
Continued
293
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 295
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 110
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 137
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 139
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 135
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 134
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
294
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 66
295
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 420, 422
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 420, 422
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
296
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
297
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 417
298
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models without smart entry system
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
299
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 326
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or
(R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to
(D, (S, or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START
(e for more than 15
seconds.
•
If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
•
If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 116
All models
■
Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
300
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models with smart entry system
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 116
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
Continued
301
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to
(P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in
(N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N, depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
All models
■
Stopping the Engine
1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 401
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
302
Driving
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 326
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to
(1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to
(D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
■
Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
303
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
In Rain
■
Other Precautions
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY
(q
*1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in
(N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
304
uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission
Driving
Continuously Variable Transmission
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
The following can damage the under spoiler:
•
Parking the vehicle by a parking block
•
Parallel parking along the road shoulder
•
Driving towards the bottom of a hill
•
Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
•
Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
•
Driving on a road with potholes.
2.4 ℓ engine models
305
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
*1:
Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used for normal driving
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral
Used when idling
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
Low
●
Used to further increase engine braking
●
Used when going up or down hills
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
306
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift
lever release button.
Press the shift lever release
button and shift.
Tachometer’s red zone
307
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used:
●
For normal driving
●
When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral
Used when idling
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
●
When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
308
Driving
■
Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
Tachometer’s red zone
M (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode) Indicator/Shift
Indicator
Continued
309
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■ When the shift lever is in (D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the
(+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
■ When the shift lever is in (S:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from
(S to
(D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-
speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
310
Driving
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1 to 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 to 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 to 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 to 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 to 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
6 to 7 55 mph (89 km/h)
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling
the
(- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)
311
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into
(R, or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”
■
Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
1Shifting
NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to
(R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
312
Driving
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
5-speed manual
transmission
1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 27 mph (43 km/h)
3rd to 4th 39 mph (63 km/h)
4th to 5th 53 mph (85 km/h)
Shift Up Normal Acceleration
1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h)
3rd to 4th 37 mph (59 km/h)
4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h)
5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)
5-speed manual transmission models
6-speed manual transmission models
6-speed manual
transmission
313
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to
(R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to
(R.
2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY
(q or LOCK (0
*1
.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R.
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
Your vehicle’s lockout mechanism stops you from accidentally shifting into
(R from
the 5th gear. Always shift to (N first, then to (R.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Reverse Lockout
6-speed manual transmission models
5-speed manual transmission models
314
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
*
Driving
ECON Button
*
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, heating and cooling system
*
/climate
control system
*
, and cruise control.
* Not available on all models
315
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Continued
Driving
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator pedal. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can
travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.
3
WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
1.8 ℓ engine models
Manual transmission models
When to use
■
Shift positions for cruise control:
In
(D or (S
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Continuously variable transmission models
■
Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
■
Press the
CRUISE
button on
the steering wheel.
316
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button
On when cruise control begins
Press and release
On
On
317
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
■
To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•
When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•
When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
CRUISE
Button
CANCEL
Button
318
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire types and sizes
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures are as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
319
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® stops and the indicator comes on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® On and Off
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
*
comes on or
blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF
Indicator
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
VSA® OFF
Indicator
* Not available on all models
320
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
Driving
LaneWatch
TM
*
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
•
Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
•
Your tires are over or under inflated.
•
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
1 2
Camera
Audio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.
Press the LaneWatch
button.
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
* Not available on all models
321
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatch
TM
*
Driving
■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the length of time the LaneWatch
display stays on after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Next Maneuver Pop up
*
: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.
• Display: Allows for display adjustments of items, such as brightness, and tint.
This setting is part of the Audio setup group.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
■ Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.
1LaneWatch
TM
*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in
(R.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
•
The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
•
Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
•
Do not touch the camera lens.
2
3
1
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending road conditions and
vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on
the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual
distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
•
The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
•
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
322
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the i-MID.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 372
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The shift lever is in
(N.
• The shift lever is in
(P.
• The ignition switch is in ON
(w
*1
.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
TPMS Calibration
U.S. models
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•
Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•
Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 372
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
•
You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
•
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
•
Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
•
A compact spare tire is used.
•
There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
•
Snow chains are used.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
All models
323
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
You can calibrate the system from the customized
features on the i-MID.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Press the MENU button to go to the
Vehicle Menu screen.
3. Select Customize Settings with the
(+/(-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select TPMS Calibration with the (+/(-
button, then press the SOURCE button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Initialize.
5. Select Yes with the
(+/(- button, then
press the SOURCE button.
u When the calibration is complete, the
The TPMS has been initialized.
message appears, and the display returns
to the customization menu screen.
• If the Unable to initialize TPMS. message
appears, repeat steps 4-5.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1TPMS Calibration
•
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.
•
The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
•
During this period, if the ignition is turned on and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
324
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
325
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
326
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.
To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
■
Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE appears on the i-MID.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
327
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with front disc brakes. The brakes on the rear wheels may
be disc or drum, depending on the model. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the
effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping
force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-
lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 329
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 328
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
328
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
•
When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
•
When snow chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
329
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
■
Brake Assist System
330
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from
(D to (P.
3. Move the shift lever to
(R or (1.
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•
Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•
Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
331
Driving
Rearview Camera
*
About Your Rearview Camera
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for the
rearview camera.
The i-MID can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to
(R.
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to
(R.
The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further
than they actually are.
■
Rearview Camera Display Area
1About Your Rearview Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions, such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures, may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features
*
P. 220
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into
(R.
Off: Guidelines do not appear when the dynamic
guideline is off.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Models with display audio system
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
Models without navigation system
Models with display audio system
Bumper
Guidelines
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Camera
* Not available on all models
332
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance.
Use of a gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
Continued
333
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 liters)
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.
1How to Refuel
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Push
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
334
Driving
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
Cap
Cap
Holder
335
Driving
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the i-
MID.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
L per 100 km
Liters of
fuel
Kilometers
driven
336
Driving
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 413
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
337
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 338
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 339
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 340
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 341
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 345
Opening the Hood ........................... 347
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 348
Oil Check......................................... 349
Adding Engine Oil............................ 351
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 352
Engine Coolant................................ 355
Transmission Fluid............................ 357
Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 358
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 359
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 360
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 370
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 372
Tire and Loading Information Label...... 373
Tire Labeling .................................... 373
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......375
Wear Indicators................................ 377
Tire Service Life................................ 377
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 378
Tire Rotation.................................... 379
Winter Tires ..................................... 380
Battery............................................... 381
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 382
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate
Control System
*
Maintenance....... 384
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 385
Exterior Care.................................... 387
* Not available on all models
338
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the continuously variable transmission fluid level monthly.
2 Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid P. 357
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 358
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 372
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 360
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 370
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the i-MID.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 343
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 431
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
339
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■
Maintenance Safety
■
Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
340
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
341
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the i-MID every time you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
. The
messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle
to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the i-MID.
You can view them on the Maintenance info screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Press the MENU button to go to the Vehicle Menu screen.
3. Select Vehicle Information with the (+ button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Press the SOURCE button again to go to the Maintenance info screen. The
engine oil life appears on the i-MID.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the i-MID.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 343
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
MENU
SOURCE
50
Engine oil
Air filters
2345
MENU Button
(+ Button
Sub Item
Engine Oil Life
Main ItemSOURCE Button
342
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the i-MID
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
SERVICE DUE SOON 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to
6 percent. Once you switch the
display by pressing the (display/
information) button, this message
will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and serviced
soon.
SERVICE DUE NOW 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent. Press the button to
switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
SERVICE PAST DUE Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving over
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
2345
15
Engine oil
Air filters
2345
2345
5
Engine oil
Air filters
2345
2345
2345
-30
343
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•
Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
•
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
2345
Maintenance Minder
Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub Items
Main
Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
●
Check parking brake adjustment
●
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●
Inspect suspension components
●
Inspect driveshaft boots
●
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●
Inspect exhaust system
#
●
Inspect fuel lines and connections
#
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4:
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
Continuously variable transmission models
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
344
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
.
2. Go to the Maintenance info screen.
2 Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items P. 341
3. Press the SOURCE button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the i-MID.
4. Select Yes with the (- button, then press the SOURCE button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
u Any maintenance items that are necessary for your vehicle at the next
maintenance service will appear.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select No, then press the SOURCE button.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
SOURCE
5
Engine oil
Air filters
2345
Engine
Oil Life
SOURCE
Button
(- Button
Maintenance Item Codes
345
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.8 ℓ engine models
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant Reserve TankRadiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Manual transmission
models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
346
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
Maintenance
2.4 ℓ engine models
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Battery
347
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
348
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
Ambient Temperature
349
uuMaintenance Under the Hood uOil Check
Continued
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
2.4 ℓ engine models
1.8 ℓ engine models
350
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
1.8 ℓ engine models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
2.4 ℓ engine models
351
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil
Fill Cap
1.8 ℓ engine models
Engine Oil
Fill Cap
2.4 ℓ engine models
352
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the i-MID.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the screws on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Under Cover
Screw
1.8 ℓ engine
models
1.8 ℓ engine models
353
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Continued
Maintenance
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1.8 ℓ engine models
Drain Bolt
Washer
2.4 ℓ engine models
Drain
Bolt
Washer
All models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
354
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including filter):
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
2.4 ℓ engine models
Oil Filter
1.8 ℓ engine models
Oil Filter
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
355
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Continued
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Reserve
Tank
MAX
MIN
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
356
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to
relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
■
Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
Radiator Cap
357
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
■
Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: HCF-2
■
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Models with continuously variable transmission
1Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle warranty.
Models with manual transmission
1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
358
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
■
Checking the Clutch Fluid
Manual transmission models
1Checking the Clutch Fluid
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
clutch plate as soon as possible.
Clutch Reservoir
MIN
MAX
359
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the i-MID.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Canadian models
360
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)
■
High Beam Headlight
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
Continued
361
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
Maintenance
1. Remove the holding clips (A). Push up the
tab, and remove the cover of the air intake
duct and its upper part.
■
Low Beam Headlights
1Low Beam Headlights
Pull the clip straight up to remove it.
Keep the head of the clip raised when you insert it,
push until it clicks.
Holding clip (A-type)
Cover
Tab
Clip (A)
Air
Intake
Duct
Driver side
1.8 ℓ engine models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
362
Maintenance
1. Unlock the holding clips (B), then remove
the cover of the air intake duct.
Fold in the upper part of the air intake duct to
get enough working space.
1Low Beam Headlights
Press down the center pin until it clicks to unlock it.
Push the center pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the center pin until
it is flat.
Holding clip (B-type)
Center pin
Push until
the pin is
flat.
Cover
Clip (B)
Driver side
2.4 ℓ engine models
Air Intake Duct
363
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
Maintenance
2. Remove the holding clip (C) using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then remove the upper part of
the windshield washer reservoir.
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
1Low Beam Headlights
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Holding clip (C-type)
Center pin
Push until the
pin is flat.
Clip (C)
Passenger side
All models
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
Both sides
All models
364
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs
*
Maintenance
Fog Light Bulbs
*
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver into the tab on
the cover, then pull straight out as indicated
to remove the cover.
2. Remove the screws using a Phillips-head
screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light
assembly out of the bumper.
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Fog Light: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)
1Fog Light Bulbs
*
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Cover
Tab
Screw
Bulb
Coupler
Tab
* Not available on all models
365
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Continued
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips, and a screw, and
pull the inner fender back.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 361
3. Detach the air intake duct tube and swing it
out of the inner fender.
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W
Clip
Inner
Fender
Screw
Air
Intake
Duct
Tube
2.4 ℓ engine models
366
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Socket
All models
367
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, Back-Up Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light,
Back-Up Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 361
2. Pull out the clip.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Rear Side Marker Light: 5 W
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Lining
Clip
Bulb
Socket
Clip
368
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 361
3. Remove the license plate light assembly by
squeezing the tabs on both sides of the
socket.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
369
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb
Maintenance
High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light: 21 W
LX and Canadian EX models
Bulb
Socket
EX-L, Si and U.S. EX models
370
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab.
Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Lock Tab
371
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top
Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
372
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm
2
) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 377
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 322
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
U.S. models
373
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a
The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b
The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c
The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d
The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P205/55 R16 89H
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
205: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
16: Rim diameter in inches.
89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
374
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
375
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
376
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
377
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 112 mph or 180
km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below
to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire
failure.
*1: Optional for U.S. Si models (summer tires)
Tire Size P215/45R17 87V
Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Tire Size 225/40R18 92V
225/40R18 92Y
*1
Pressure 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
)
Models with P215/45R17 87V tires
Models with 225/40R18 92V tires
Models with 225/40R18 92Y tires
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
378
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
379
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the i-MID helps to
distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 322
FRONT
Direction Mark
U.S. models
Front
Front
380
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Your vehicle’s tires are not suitable for mounting any traction device.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
Models with P205/55R16 tires
Models with P215/45R17 tires
Models with 225/40R18 tires
381
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 163
• The clock resets.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 100
• The navigation system
*
is disabled.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminal with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
* Not available on all models
382
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-
head screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■
Master Keys with Remote Transmitter
*
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Screw
Battery type: CR1620
Battery
* Not available on all models
383
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
Maintenance
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■
Smart Entry Remote
*
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
* Not available on all models
384
Maintenance
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system
*
/
climate control system
*
deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
* Not available on all models
385
Continued
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
uuCleaninguInterior Care
386
Maintenance
The floor mats for the driver, and the rear
passenger on the passenger’s side hook over
the floor anchors, which keep the mats from
sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning,
turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
■
Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
Front
(Driver Side)
Lock
Unlock
Rear
(Right Side)
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
* Not available on all models
387
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Continued
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
uuCleaninguExterior Care
388
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
*
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
* Not available on all models
389
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
390
391
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 392
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 393
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 400
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak ... 401
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 402
Jump Starting.................................... 403
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 406
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 407
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ..409
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 409
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 410
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On ................................................. 411
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 411
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks........................ 412
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 413
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 416
Emergency Towing........................... 417
393
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Put the shift lever in
(P.
2. Put the shift lever in
(R.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0
*1
.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
394
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
■
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
NOTICE
Do not mount the compact spare on the front. If
mounted on the front, the compact spare, smaller in
size than the normal tire, may damage the
differential.
If either front tire goes flat, remove the rear tire on
the same side, and mount the compact spare on the
rear and the rear tire on the front.
2.4 ℓ engine models
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
395
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
396
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
•
Do not use while the engine is running.
•
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•
Use only at the jacking points.
•
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Continued
397
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
1. Remove the wheel nuts, wheel cover, and
flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
■
Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the wheel cover off
with a screwdriver or other tool.
The wheel cover cannot be removed without first
removing the wheel nuts.
Models with wheel cover
Models with aluminum wheels
Wheel
Cover
Models with wheel cover
All models
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
398
Handling the Unexpected
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.
■
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Spacer
Cone
Wing
Bolt
For compact spare tire
For full-
size tire
Models with aluminum wheels
All models
399
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM appears on the i-MID, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 322
■
TPMS and the Spare Tire
U.S. models
400
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the i-MID.
●
If the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR START BUTTON message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 401
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 123
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
●
If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 381
●
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 413
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 298
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 116
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 81
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 416
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 417
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 403
Models with smart entry system
401
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR START BUTTON
message appears on the i-MID, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (continuously
variable transmission) or clutch pedal
(manual transmission) and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds and the
indicator stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
Models with smart entry system
402
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
Models with smart entry system
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
Continuously variable transmission models
Canadian continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
403
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15-
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
■
Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
Booster Battery
uuJump Startingu
404
Handling the Unexpected
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
1.8 ℓ engine models
2.4 ℓ engine models
405
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
406
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key in, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■
Releasing the Lock
Continuously variable transmission models
Slot
Cover
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
Release
Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
407
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The high temperature indicator comes on or the engine suddenly loses power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the high temperature
indicator on may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
408
Handling the Unexpected
■ Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the high temperature
indicator goes off.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the high temperature
indicator.
If the high temperature indicator is off, resume driving. If it stays on, contact a dealer
for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX
Reserve Tank
MIN
409
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system
*
/climate control system
*
, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
* Not available on all models
410
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
■
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
411
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
412
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.
U.S. models
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
413
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1
EPS 70 A
− (40 A)
ABS/VSA Motor 30 A
ABS/VSA FSR 30 A
Wiper Motor
*2
−
*3
30 A
(30 A)
Main Fuse 100 A
2
IG Main
30 A
*2
50 A
*3
Fuse Box Main 60 A
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A
Headlight Main 30 A
ST MG Switch
*2
−
*3
30 A
(30 A)
Rear Defogger 40 A
IG Main 2
*2
−
*3
30 A
(30 A)
Blower 40 A
−(30 A)
Sub Fan Motor 20 A
Main Fan Motor 20 A
3 − −
4
−
*2
Left Headlight Low Beam
*3
−
15 A
5
START DIAG
*2
ST MG
*3
7.5 A
7.5 A
*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Models with smart entry system
*3:Models without smart entry system
6
−
*2
Right Headlight Low Beam
*3
−
15 A
7 − −
8− −
9 − −
10 − −
11 Oil Level 7.5 A
12 Fog Lights
*
(20 A)
13 − −
14 Hazard 10 A
15 FI Sub 15 A
16 IG Coil 15 A
17 Stop 15 A
18 Horn 10 A
19 Premium Amp
*
(20 A)
20
Right Headlight Low Beam
*2
−
*3
15 A
−
21 IGP 15 A
22 DBW 15 A
23
Left Headlight Low Beam
*2
Headlight Low Beam
*3
15 A
20 A
24 − −
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
414
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
*1:Models with smart entry system
*2:Models without smart entry system
Circuit Protected Amps
25 MG Clutch 7.5 A
26
Washer
*1
−
*2
15 A
−
27 SMALL 20 A
28 Interior Lights 7.5 A
29 Backup 10 A
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
■
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Circuit Protected Amps
1 HAC Option
*
(20 A)
2 ACG 10 A
3 SRS 10 A
4 Fuel Pump 15 A
5 Meter 7.5 A
6 Power Window 7.5 A
7 VB SOL
*
(15 A)
8 Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock) 15 A
9 Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock) 15 A
10 − −
11 Moonroof
*
(20 A)
12
Accessory Power Socket
(Center Console)
*
(20 A)
13 − −
14 Seat Heaters
*
(15 A)
15
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
(Unlock)
*
(10 A)
16 − −
17 − −
18 − −
19 ACC 7.5 A
20 ACC Key Lock 7.5 A
21 Daytime Running Lights 7.5 A
22 HAC 7.5 A
23 HAC
*
(7.5 A)
24 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
25 ACC
*
(7.5 A)
26 − −
27
Accessory Power Socket
(Front)
20 A
28 Washer (15 A)
29 ODS 7.5 A
30
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
(Lock)
(10 A)
31 SMART
*
(10 A)
32 Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock) 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
415
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
33 Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock) 15 A
34 Small Lights 7.5 A
35 Illumination 7.5 A
36 − −
37 − −
38 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
39 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
40 TPMS
*
(7.5 A)
41 Door Lock 20 A
42 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
43
Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window
*
(20 A)
44
Front Passenger’s Side
Power Window
20 A
45
Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window
*
(20 A)
46 Wiper (30 A)
− STS
*
(7.5 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
416
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0
*1
. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 413 to 414.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined
Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
417
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
418
419
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 420
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number ......................................... 424
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 425
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 426
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 427
Warranty Coverages ........................ 429
Authorized Manuals......................... 431
Customer Service Information......... 432
420
Information
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
*1: LX models
*2: EX and U.S. EX-L models
*3: Canadian EX-L models
*4: Manual transmission models
*5: Continuously variable transmission models
Model Honda Civic 2-Door
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
U.S.: 3,682 lbs (1,670 kg)
*1, *4
Canada: 1,670 kg
*1, *4
U.S.: 3,704 lbs (1,680 kg)
*1, *5
Canada: 1,680 kg
*1, *5
U.S.: 3,792 lbs (1,720 kg)
*2, *3
Canada: 1,720 kg
*2, *3
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 1,985 lbs (900 kg)
*1, *4
Canada: 900 kg
*1, *4
U.S.: 1,996 lbs (905 kg)
*1, *5
Canada: 910 kg
*1, *5
U.S.: 2,040 lbs (925 kg)
*2
Canada: 925 kg
*2
Canada: 930 kg
*3
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 1,742 lbs (790 kg)
*1
Canada: 790 kg
*1
U.S.: 1,786 lbs (810 kg)
*2, *3
Canada: 810 kg
*2, *3
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
1.8 ℓ engine models
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 110 cu-in (1,798 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs
NGK DILZKR7B11GS
DENSO DXU22HCR-D11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 13.2 US gal (50 ℓ)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ)
■ Light Bulbs
*6: LX and Canadian EX models
*7: EX-L and U.S. EX models
Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)
Fog Lights
*
55W (H11)
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side
Marker Lights
28/8W
Brake/Taillights 21/5W
Rear Side Marker Light 5W
Back-Up Lights 16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light
*6
21W
High-Mount Brake Light
*7
LED
Rear License Plate Light 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
* Not available on all models
421
uuSpecificationsu
Continued
Information
■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
■ Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified HCF-2
Capacity Change 3.6 US qt (3.4 ℓ)
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change 1.5 US qt (1.4 ℓ)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
3.9 US qt (3.7 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.48 US gal (5.59 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.125 US gal (0.475 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*1: Except EX-L model
*2: EX-L model
Regular
Size
P205/55R16 89H
*1
P215/45R17 87V
*2
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm
2
])
32 (220 [2.2])
Compact
Spare
Size T135/80D15 99M
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
16 x 6 1/2J
*1
17 x 7J
*2
Compact Spare 15 x 4T
422
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Vehicle Specifications
Model Honda Civic 2-Door
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
U.S.: 3,925 lbs (1,780 kg)
Canada: 1,780 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
U.S.: 2,117 lbs (960 kg)
Canada: 960 kg
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
U.S.: 1,830 lbs (830 kg)
Canada: 830 kg
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
Lubricant Type SP-10
2.4 ℓ engine models
■ Engine Specifications
■ Fuel
■ Washer Fluid
Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs
NGK ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO SXU22HCR11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded premium gasoline, Pump octane
number of 91 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 13.2 US gal (50 ℓ)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ)
■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)
Fog Lights 55W (H11)
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side
Marker Lights
28/8W
Brake/Taillights 21/5W
Rear Side Marker Light 5W
Back-Up Lights 16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
423
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)
■ Engine Oil
■ Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
filter
4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.45 US gal (5.5 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.125 US gal (0.475 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■ Tire
*1: Optional for U.S. models (summer tires)
Regular
Size
225/40R18 92V
225/40R18 92Y
*1
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm
2
])
33 (230 [2.3])
32 (220 [2.2])
*1
Compact
Spare
Size T135/80D16 101M
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular 18 x 7 1/2J
Compact Spare 16 x 4T
424
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The
locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number and transmission number are shown
as follows.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Manual Transmission
Number/Continuously
Variable Transmission
Number
2.4 ℓ engine models
1.8 ℓ engine models
Engine Number
Manual Transmission
Number
425
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
426
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
427
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has “Readiness Codes,” as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components
are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON
(w
*1
, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 °F and 95 °F (4 °C and 35 °C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in
(P (continuously variable transmission) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
428
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise
control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds,
then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
429
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
430
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
431
Information
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners:
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you
may require.
432
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•
Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number P. 424
•
Date of purchase
•
Odometer reading of your vehicle
•
Your name, address, and telephone number
•
A detailed description of the problem
•
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Index
433
Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode ................... 309
Operation ............................................... 310
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 328
Accessories and Modifications ................ 336
Accessory Power Socket........................... 150
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 355
Engine Oil ............................................... 348
Washer ................................................... 359
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 144
Clock ...................................................... 100
Front Seats.............................................. 137
Head Restraints....................................... 139
Mirrors.................................................... 135
Rear Seats............................................... 143
Steering Wheel ....................................... 134
Temperature ............................................. 86
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 155
Changing the Mode................................ 156
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 156
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 384
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 156
Sensor .................................................... 157
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 155
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System) ...................................... 152
Cooling ................................................... 154
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 154
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 384
Heating ................................................... 153
Air Pressure ............................... 373, 421, 423
Airbags ........................................................ 37
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43
After a Collision......................................... 40
Airbag Care............................................... 49
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40
Indicator.............................................. 47, 70
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 48
Sensors...................................................... 37
Side Airbags .............................................. 44
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 46
AM/FM Radio .................................... 168, 191
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 328
Indicator.................................................... 69
Armrest ..................................................... 144
Audio Remote Controls............................ 164
Audio System ............................................ 160
Adjusting the Sound........................ 167, 189
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 162
Error Messages ........................................ 211
General Information ................................ 217
Internet Radio.................................. 177, 200
iPod......................................................... 197
MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 179, 202, 207
Reactivating ............................................ 163
Recommended CDs................................. 217
Recommended Devices............................ 219
Remote Controls ..................................... 164
Security Code.......................................... 163
Theft Protection ...................................... 163
USB Adapter Cable.......................... 161, 162
USB Flash Drives...................................... 219
USB/HDMI® Port...................................... 161
Authorized Manuals ................................ 431
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 112
Customize................................................. 94
Automatic Lighting .................................. 128
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 162
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 85
Average Speed ........................................... 85
B
Battery ...................................................... 381
Charging System Indicator................. 67, 409
Jump Starting.......................................... 403
Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 381
Maintenance (Replacing) ......................... 382
Belts (Seat).................................................. 30
Beverage Holders ..................................... 149
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 182, 205
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 233, 264
Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 61
434
Index
Brake System............................................. 326
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 328
Brake Assist System ................................. 329
Fluid ........................................................ 358
Foot Brake ............................................... 327
Indicator .................................................... 66
Indicator (Amber)....................................... 66
Indicator (Red) ......................................... 411
Parking Brake .......................................... 326
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ................ 66
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 132
Bulb Replacement..................................... 360
Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker lights,
Back-Up Lights and Rear Turn Signal
Lights..................................................... 367
Fog Lights................................................ 364
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker
Lights..................................................... 365
Headlights ............................................... 360
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 369
Rear License Plate Light............................ 368
Bulb Specifications............................ 420, 422
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 62
Carrying Cargo.................................. 293, 295
CD Player ........................................... 171, 194
Center Pocket............................................ 148
Certification Label .................................... 424
Changing Bulbs......................................... 360
Charging System Indicator................. 67, 409
Child Safety................................................. 50
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 115
Child Seat.................................................... 50
Booster Seats ............................................ 61
Child Seat for Infants................................. 52
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 53
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 57
Larger Children ......................................... 60
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 52
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 54
Using a Tether........................................... 59
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 387
Cleaning the Interior................................ 385
Climate Control System............................ 155
Changing the Mode ................................ 155
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 156
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 384
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 156
Sensors ................................................... 157
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 155
Clock.......................................................... 100
Clutch Fluid............................................... 358
Coat Hook................................................. 150
Compact Spare Tire .................. 393, 421, 423
Console Compartment ............................. 147
Continuously Variable Transmission
Creeping ................................................. 304
Fluid........................................................ 357
Kickdown ............................................... 304
Operating the Shift Lever .......... 18, 306, 308
Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 406
Shifting........................................... 305, 307
Controls ...................................................... 99
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 355
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 356
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 355
High Temperature Indicator ...................... 70
Low Temperature Indicator ....................... 70
Overheating............................................ 407
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 304
Cruise Control .......................................... 315
Indicator ................................................... 75
Cup Holders.............................................. 149
Customer Service Information ................ 432
Customized Features ......................... 87, 220
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 130
Dead Battery ............................................ 403
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows......................................... 154, 156
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 425
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 127
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 135
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 349
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 127
435
Index
Display Button.......................................... 185
Display/Information Button ...................... 83
Door Mirrors............................................. 135
Doors ........................................................ 102
Auto Door Locking.................................. 112
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 112
Door Open Indicator ........................... 29, 71
Keys........................................................ 102
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside .................................................... 110
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ................................................. 105
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 109
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 375
Driving ...................................................... 291
Braking ................................................... 326
Continuously Variable Transmission ........ 304
Cruise Control ........................................ 315
Shifting Gear .......................................... 311
Shifting Position.............................. 305, 307
Starting the Engine ......................... 298, 300
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 384
E
Eco Assist System.......................................... 9
ECON Button ............................................ 314
Elapsed Time .............................................. 85
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 72, 411
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 318
Emergency Engine Stop ........................... 402
Emergency Towing ................................... 417
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 115
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 427
Engine
Coolant ................................................... 355
Jump Starting .......................................... 403
Oil ........................................................... 348
Starting ........................................... 298, 300
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 122
Engine Coolant ......................................... 355
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 356
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 355
High Temperature Indicator ....................... 70
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 70
Overheating ............................................ 407
Engine Oil ................................................. 348
Adding .................................................... 351
Checking................................................. 349
Displaying Oil Life .................................... 341
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 67, 409
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 348
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 123
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 62
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 136
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 387
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 135
F
Features..................................................... 159
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 384
Oil........................................................... 352
Flat Tire..................................................... 393
Floor Mats................................................. 386
Fluids
Brake/Clutch ........................................... 358
Continuously Variable Transmission......... 357
Engine Coolant ....................................... 355
Manual Transmission............................... 357
Windshield Washer ................................. 359
Fog Light Indicator..................................... 73
Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 143
Foot Brake ................................................ 327
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 40
Front Seats................................................ 137
Adjusting ................................................ 137
Fuel...................................................... 19, 332
Economy................................................. 335
Gauge....................................................... 81
Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 81, 86
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69
Range ....................................................... 85
Recommendation .................................... 332
Refueling................................................. 332
Fuel Economy ........................................... 335
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 19, 334
Message.................................................. 410
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 19, 333
Fuses.......................................................... 413
Inspecting and Changing......................... 416
436
Index
Locations ......................................... 413, 414
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 335
Gauge ....................................................... 81
Information ............................................. 332
Instant Fuel Economy........................... 81, 86
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69
Refueling................................................. 332
Gauges......................................................... 81
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Continuously Variable
Transmission .................................. 305, 307
Manual Transmission ............................... 312
Glass (care) ................................................ 388
Glove Box .................................................. 147
H
Halogen Bulbs........................................... 364
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 391
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 233, 264
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History .................................... 249, 276
Automatic Transferring ............................ 247
Caller’s ID Information ............................. 247
Displaying Messages........................ 260, 285
HFL Buttons ..................................... 233, 264
HFL Menus ...................................... 235, 266
HFL Status Display ........................... 234, 265
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 234
Making a Call.................................. 253, 279
Options During a Call ...................... 258, 282
Phone Setup.................................... 240, 270
Receiving a Call ............................... 257, 282
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail...... 259, 283
Ring Tone................................................ 275
Selecting a Mail Account ......................... 284
Speed Dial....................................... 250, 277
Text Message .................. 245, 259, 274, 283
To Clear the System ................................ 248
To Create a Security PIN .......................... 246
To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail
Options ......................................... 245, 274
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Head Restraints ........................................ 139
Headlights................................................. 127
Aiming .................................................... 360
Automatic Operation............................... 128
Dimming ......................................... 127, 130
Operating................................................ 127
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 151
Heating and Cooling System ................... 152
Cooling ................................................... 154
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 154
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 384
Heating ................................................... 153
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 233, 264
High Beam Indicator .................................. 73
Hill Start Assist System..................... 299, 302
I
Identification Numbers............................ 424
Vehicle Identification............................... 424
Ignition Switch ......................................... 122
Illumination Control ................................ 132
Knob ...................................................... 132
i-MID ........................................................... 83
Immobilizer System.................................. 116
Indicator ................................................... 74
Indicators.................................................... 66
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 69
Brake System (Amber)............................... 66
Charging System............................... 67, 409
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 75, 316
CRUISE MAIN.................................... 75, 315
Door Open.......................................... 29, 71
ECON Mode ..................................... 75, 314
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 72, 411
Fog Light .................................................. 73
High Beam................................................ 73
High Temperature..................................... 70
Immobilizer System ................................... 74
i-VTEC ................................................ 75, 82
Lights On .................................................. 73
Low Fuel ................................................... 69
Low Oil Pressure ............................... 67, 409
Low Temperature...................................... 70
437
Index
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............ 72, 322, 324
Maintenance Minder............................... 341
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 67, 410
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Red) ............................................... 66, 411
REV..................................................... 75, 82
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 31, 69
Security System Alarm............................... 74
Shift Lever Position.................................... 68
Smart Entry System ................................... 74
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 47, 70
System Message ....................................... 73
Transmission ............................................. 68
Trunk Open .............................................. 71
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning............... 73
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 71, 318
VSA® OFF.......................................... 71, 319
Information .............................................. 419
Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 81, 86
Instrument Panel........................................ 65
Brightness Control .................................. 132
intelligent Multi-Information Display
(i-MID)....................................................... 83
Interior Lights........................................... 145
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 135
i-VTEC and REV Indicators ......................... 82
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 396
Jump Starting ........................................... 403
K
Key Number Tag....................................... 103
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 109
Keys ........................................................... 102
Lockout Prevention.................................. 109
Master Keys............................................. 102
Number Tag ............................................ 103
Remote Transmitter ................................. 105
Types and Functions ................................ 102
Valet Key................................................. 103
Won’t Turn................................................ 22
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission) .......................................... 304
L
LaneWatch
TM
............................................. 320
Language (HFL)................................. 234, 265
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 55
Lights................................................. 127, 360
Automatic ............................................... 128
Bulb Replacement.................................... 360
Daytime Running Lights........................... 130
Fog Lights................................................ 130
High Beam Indicator .................................. 73
Interior .................................................... 145
Light Switches ......................................... 127
Lights On Indicator .................................... 73
Turn Signals ............................................ 127
Load Limits................................................ 295
Locking/Unlocking the Doors .................. 102
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 112
From Inside ............................................. 110
From Outside .......................................... 105
Keys........................................................ 102
Using a Key ............................................. 109
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 109
Low Battery Charge ................................. 409
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 69
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 409
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength .................................................. 104
Lower Anchors............................................ 55
Lubricant Specifications Chart......... 421, 423
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 295
M
Maintenance............................................. 337
Battery .................................................... 381
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 358
Cleaning ................................................. 385
Climate Control System........................... 384
Coolant................................................... 355
Heating and Cooling System ................... 384
Maintenance Minder
TM
............................ 341
Oil........................................................... 349
Precautions ............................................. 338
Radiator .................................................. 356
438
Index
Remote Transmitter ................................. 382
Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 360
Safety...................................................... 339
Service Items............................................ 343
Tires ........................................................ 372
Transmission Fluid.................................... 357
Under the Hood....................................... 345
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 67, 410
Manual Transmission................................ 311
Map Lights ................................................ 146
Maximum Load Limit................................ 295
Meters, Gauges........................................... 81
Mirrors....................................................... 135
Adjusting................................................. 135
Door........................................................ 135
Exterior.................................................... 135
Interior Rearview...................................... 135
Modifications (and Accessories)............... 336
Moonroof.................................................. 121
MP3............................ 171, 179, 194, 202, 207
Multi-Information Display.......................... 83
N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 424
O
Odometer.................................................... 84
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 348
Adding .................................................... 351
Checking................................................. 349
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 341
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 409
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 348
Viscosity .................................................. 348
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 347
Moonroof ............................................... 121
Power Windows ...................................... 119
Trunk ...................................................... 113
Outside Temperature Display.................... 86
Overheating.............................................. 407
P
Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode)...................................................... 309
Pandora® ........................................... 178, 201
Panic Mode ............................................... 118
Parking...................................................... 330
Parking Brake ........................................... 326
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Red) .................................................. 66, 411
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 48
Passing Indicators ..................................... 127
Power Windows ....................................... 119
Precautions While Driving ....................... 303
Rain ........................................................ 303
Pregnant Women ....................................... 35
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 393
R
Radiator.................................................... 356
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 168, 191
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 170, 192
Range.......................................................... 85
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 170, 192
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 427
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button..................................................... 133
Rear Seat Access....................................... 142
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 143
Rearview Camera ..................................... 331
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 135
Refueling .................................................. 332
Fuel Gauge ............................................... 81
Gasoline ................................. 332, 420, 422
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69
Regulations .............................. 324, 375, 425
Remote Transmitter................................. 105
Replacement
Battery.................................................... 382
Bulbs ...................................................... 360
Fuses .............................................. 413, 414
Tires........................................................ 378
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 370
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 426
Resetting a Trip Meter............................... 84
S
Safe Driving................................................ 25
439
Index
Safety Check............................................... 29
Safety Labels .............................................. 63
Safety Message ............................................ 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 30
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 32
Checking .................................................. 36
Fastening .................................................. 33
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 57
Pregnant Women...................................... 35
Reminder .................................................. 31
Warning Indicator ............................... 31, 69
Seat Heaters ............................................. 151
Seats.......................................................... 137
Adjusting ................................................ 137
Front Seats.............................................. 137
Rear Seats............................................... 143
Seat Heaters ........................................... 151
Security System ........................................ 116
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 74
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 74
SEL/RESET Knob.......................................... 83
Select Lever ........................ 18, 305, 307, 311
Operation ......................... 18, 306, 308, 311
Releasing ................................................ 406
Won’t Move ........................................... 406
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 54
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 166
Shift Lever .......................... 18, 305, 307, 311
Shift Lever Position Indicator .................... 68
Shift Position Indicator .................... 306, 308
Shifting (Transmission)............. 305, 307, 311
Side Airbags ................................................ 44
Side Curtain Airbags................................... 46
Smart Entry System Indicator..................... 74
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ..................................................... 107
SMS Text Message ............ 245, 259, 274, 283
Snow Tires................................................. 380
Spare Tire .................................. 393, 421, 423
Spark Plugs........................................ 420, 422
Specifications ............................................ 420
Specified Fuel............................ 332, 420, 422
Speedometer .............................................. 81
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 40
Starting the Engine .......................... 298, 300
Does Not Start......................................... 400
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 122
Jump Starting .......................................... 403
Steering Wheel ......................................... 134
Adjusting................................................. 134
Stopping.................................................... 330
Summer Tires ............................................ 380
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 40
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 122
System Message Indicator.......................... 73
T
Tachometer................................................. 81
Temperature
High Temperature Indicator....................... 70
Low Temperature Indicator........................ 70
Outside Temperature Display..................... 86
Temperature Sensor................................... 86
Text Message.................................... 245, 259
Time (Setting)........................................... 100
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 322
Indicator............................................ 72, 412
Tires........................................................... 372
Air Pressure............................. 373, 421, 423
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 372
Inspection ............................................... 372
Labeling .................................................. 373
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 393
Regulations ............................................. 375
Rotation .................................................. 379
Spare Tire................................ 393, 421, 423
Summer .................................................. 380
Tire Chains .............................................. 380
Wear Indicators....................................... 377
Winter..................................................... 380
Tools.......................................................... 392
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 297
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 297
Emergency .............................................. 417
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 322
Indicator............................................ 72, 412
440
Index
Transmission.............................. 305, 307, 311
Continuously Variable
Transmission .................................. 305, 307
Fluid ........................................................ 357
Manual.................................................... 311
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 68, 306, 308
Trip Meter ................................................... 84
Troubleshooting ....................................... 391
Blown Fuse...................................... 413, 414
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 22
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 23
Emergency Towing .................................. 417
Engine Won’t Start .................................. 400
Noise When Braking .................................. 23
Overheating............................................. 407
Premium Gasoline............................ 332, 422
Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 393
Shift Lever Won’t Move ........................... 406
Warning Indicators .................................... 66
Trunk ......................................................... 113
Lid........................................................... 113
Light Bulb ........................................ 420, 422
Turn Signals............................................... 127
Turn Signals and Hazard Warning
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 73
U
Unlocking the Doors................................. 105
Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ........ 13
USB Adapter Cable ........................... 160, 162
USB Flash Drives ....................................... 219
USB/HDMI® Port................................ 160, 161
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ..................................................... 107
V
Valet Key................................................... 103
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 424
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 318
Off Button............................................... 319
Off Indicator.............................................. 71
System Indicator........................................ 71
Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 348, 421, 423
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 318
W
Wallpaper ........................................... 95, 187
Warning and Information Messages......... 76
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 409
Warning Labels........................................... 63
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 429
Watts................................................. 420, 422
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 377
Wheel Cover ............................................. 397
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 396
Window Washers ..................................... 131
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 359
Switch .................................................... 131
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 119
Windshield ............................................... 131
Cleaning ................................................. 388
Defrosting/Defogging ..................... 154, 156
Washer Fluid........................................... 359
Wiper Blades........................................... 370
Wipers and Washers ............................... 131
Winter Tires.............................................. 380
Snow Tires .............................................. 380
Tire Chains.............................................. 380
Wipers and Washers ................................ 131
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 370
WMA......................... 171, 179, 194, 202, 207
Worn Tires ................................................ 372
